Owner’s Manual
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p.
5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the
unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every
feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its entirety. The
manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference
Copyright © 2000 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
N
G
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
H
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
U
N
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
A
Y
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
001
009
•
Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions
below, and the Owner’s Manual.
•
Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor
place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short circuits.
Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards!
................................................................................................................................................................
002a
•
................................................................................................................................................................
Do not open or perform any internal modifications on
the unit.
010
•
This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable
of producing sound levels that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a
high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult
an audiologist.
................................................................................................................................................................
003
•
Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within
it (except when this manual provides specific instruc-
tions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your
retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an autho-
rized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information”
page.
................................................................................................................................................................
011
•
................................................................................................................................................................
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to
penetrate the unit.
004
•
Never use or store the unit in places that are:
•
Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of
heat-generating equipment); or are
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
Humid; or are
Exposed to rain; or are
Dusty; or are
Subject to high levels of vibration.
................................................................................................................................................................
•
•
•
•
•
013
•
In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of
following all the rules essential for the safe operation of
the unit.
................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
005
•
014
This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is
recommended by Roland.
•
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
006
•
015
When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended
by Roland, the rack or stand must be carefully placed so
it is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or
stand, you still need to make sure that any location you
choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that
will properly support the unit, and keep it from
wobbling.
•
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an
outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension cords—the total
power used by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power
rating (watts/ amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and
eventually melt through.
................................................................................................................................................................
008a
•
The unit should be connected to a power supply only of
the type described in the operating instructions, or as
marked on the unit.
................................................................................................................................................................
016
•
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Infor-
mation” page.
................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USIN G THE UN IT SAFELY
101a
•
The unit should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
................................................................................................................................................................
102b
•
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or
this unit.
................................................................................................................................................................
104
•
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so
they are out of the reach of children.
................................................................................................................................................................
106
•
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the
unit.
................................................................................................................................................................
107b
•
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
................................................................................................................................................................
108d: Selection
•
If you need to move the instrument, take note of the
precautions listed below. At least two persons are
required to safely lift and move the unit. It should be
handled carefully, all the while keeping it level. Make
sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury
and the instrument from damage.
•
Check to make sure the knob bolts securing the unit
to the stand have not become loose. Fasten them
again securely whenever you notice any loosening.
Disconnect the power cord.
Disconnect all cords coming from external devices.
Remove the music stand.
•
•
•
................................................................................................................................................................
109a
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug
................................................................................................................................................................
110a
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in
your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the
outlet.
................................................................................................................................................................
118
•
Should you remove the screws fastening the music
stand, make sure to put them in a safe place out of
children's reach, so there is no chance of them being
swallowed accidentally.
................................................................................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2,
3 and 4, please read and observe the following:
Po w e r Su p p ly
Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s
551
301
•
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
•
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself
against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend
that you periodically save a backup copy of important
data you have stored in the unit’s memory on a floppy
disk
307
•
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/ or damage to speakers or other devices.
552
•
Pla ce m e n t
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored on a floppy disk once it
has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
351
•
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
ference.
553
•
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its
jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to
malfunctions.
352
•
This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
554
•
555
•
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
353
•
Observe the following when using the unit’s floppy disk
drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using Floppy
Disks”.
A small amount of noise may be heard from the display
during normal operation.
556
•
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
•
Do not place the unit near devices that produce a
strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while
the drive is operating.
•
•
557
•
A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
normal operation.
354b
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are
used while their light source is very close to the unit
(such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine
upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of
time. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
558a
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
559a
•
When you need to transport the unit, package it in the
box (including padding) that it came in, if possible.
Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging
materials.
355
•
To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in a wet
area, such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture.
561
•
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals,
you risk causing malfunction and/ or damage to the unit.
356
•
Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain
on the piano for long periods of time. Such objects can
discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
•
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard.
This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing
to produce sound.
357
•
Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower
vases) on the piano. Also, avoid the use of insecticides,
perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the
unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit
using a dry, soft cloth.
562
•
Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
Ma in te n a n ce
•
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
401b
•
To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is
slightly dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using
an equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with
the grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area
can damage the finish.
402
•
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/ or
deformation.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
652
•
Be fo re Usin g Flo p p y Disk s
Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect
the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that
the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to
the WRITE position only when you wish to write new
data onto the disk.
Ha n d lin g th e Flo p p y Disk Drive
602
•
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free
from vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle,
be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible
range.
Rear side of the disk
603
•
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the
drive and/ or damage floppy disks. When the unit has
been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new
environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
Write Protect Tab
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
653
•
The identification label should be firmly affixed to the
disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the
drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
6¬04
•
To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—
it will click into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT
button firmly. Do not use excessive force to remove a disk
which is lodged in the drive.
654
•
Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them,
and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards.
By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging
the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.
605b
•
Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress,
since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable. (The disk drive's indicator will
light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading
or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less
brightly lighted, or be extinguished.)
655
•
Disks containing performance data for this unit should
always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the
“Protect” position) before you insert them into the drive
on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the
HP-G/ R, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a
computer’s drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab
remains in the “Write” position), when you perform any
disk operations using the other device’s disk drive (such
as checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you
risk rendering the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk
drive.
606
•
Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or
down.
607
•
To prevent damage to the disk drive’s heads, always try
to hold the floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in
any direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in
firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.
608
•
To avoid the risk of malfunction and/ or damage, insert
only floppy disks into the disk drive. Never insert any
other type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or
any other foreign objects inside the drive.
203
* GS (
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
ration.
207
Ha n d lin g Flo p p y Disk s
651
* Apple is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc.
•
Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is
required to enable storage of large amounts of data on
such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity,
please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
208
* Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
210
* IBM is a registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
•
•
Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty
areas.
211
* IBM PC is a registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
•
•
Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recom-
mended temperature range: 0 to 50° C (50 to 122° F).
Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields,
such as those generated by loudspeakers.
* COMPOSER is a registered trademark of Roland
Corporation.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In tro d u ctio n
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KF-90 Intelligent Piano.
While the KF-90 Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano
performances, it also features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other
useful functions.
In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please
take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.
Fe a tu re s
Au th e n tic Pia n o So u n d
Co n ve n ie n t Fu n ctio n s to Su p p o rt Yo u r
Pra ctice Effo rts (Pia n o Ma ste r)
Piano Master can be used to greatly simplify a wide variety
The KF-90 reproduces the tones of a high-quality grand
piano, with stereo sampled sounds that capture the true
piano sound so well, you can even hear the hammers hitting
the strings. With a maximum polyphony of 64 stereo piano
tones, the KF-90 can handle just about any kind of
performance, even when extensive pedal work is involved.
In addition, the KF-90 features a Progressive Hammer
Action, with a heavier touch in the lower keys and lighter
touch in the upper keys, for even more realistic piano
keyboard feel. All this provides you with more natural, more
authentic piano performance.
of operations, such as practicing the same section repeatedly
any number of times, and practicing the parts for each hand.
You also get useful practice functions, such as a recording
Ex p a n d a b le En se m b le O p p o rtu n itie s
Usin g MIDI (MIDI En se m b le )
You can connect this instrument's MIDI connector to an
La rg e Disp la y a n d To u ch Pa n e l
electronic percussion instrument or other separate
instrument, allowing you to play ensemble performances. By
using “MIDI Ensemble,” you can simply connect an
instrument to the MIDI connector and start playing using
MIDI, without having to be concerned about making a lot of
MIDI settings.
The KF-90 features a large-sized display screen, and a
“Touch Panel” that allows you to perform various tasks
merely by touching items displayed on the screen, for easier
viewing and more comfortable operation.
A W id e Va rie ty o f Acco m p a n im e n t
Sty le s w ith th e Au to m a tic
Acco m p a n im e n t Fu n ctio n
The KF-90 features numerous music Styles–approximately
Ma k e Yo u r O w n Au th e n tic En se m b le
So n g s
You can use a variety of recording and editing features to
140 different Styles are provided--and an Automatic
Accompaniment function. You can use these to add the exact
accompaniment you have in mind to your own
performances.
compose your own authentic ensemble tunes.
Ma k in g Use o f Co m m e rcia lly Ava ila b le
Mu sic File s fo r Liste n in g o r Le sso n s
You can use the built-in disk drive to listen to commercial
N a vig a to r Bu tto n s Le t Yo u Ge t Stra ig h t
to W h a t Yo u W a n t to Acco m p lish
There are Navigator buttons for tones, Automatic
Accompaniment, and so on. For example, even if you don't
understand what a certain button does, you can use the Style
Navigator buttons, and just by following the on-screen
instructions, make immediate use of the Automatic
Accompaniment feature and access many other convenient
functions, allowing you to achieve the things you want to do
even more easily.
Ka ra o k e En jo y m e n t
You can connect a microphone and enjoy singing along with
add harmony to the microphone vocals, and even change
Re fin e d a n d Sim p le De sig n
From the tasteful brown tones to real wood used for the
sides, this instrument has a look to fit in naturally with your
room's interior design.
Effe cts Ad d in g Th re e -Dim e n sio n a l
Bre a d th to Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce s
(Ad va n ce d 3 D)
You can select parts in Performances and add three-
dimensional breadth to them. This provides the pleasant
effect of “wrapping” your performance within the sound.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In tro d u ctio n
Ch e ck in g th e In clu d e d Ite m s
● Owner’s Manual
● Power Cord
● Cover
● Screw Set
Screw for the
music stand x 2
● Pedal (DP-6) x 1
● Data Disk x 1
● Music Stand
Knob bolt for the stand
(FPS-9; sold separately) x 2
Ho w to Use Th is Ma n u a l
This owner's manual is organized as follows.
Quick Start
For those just starting out with the KF-90, this volume explains how to make use of the
instrument's various performance features simply and easily. We highly recommend
reading through the Quick Start manual while you play the instrument, as this will allow
you to more fully grasp the kinds of things capable with the KF-90.
Reference
This section explains the functions available with the KF-90 with easy-to-understand screen
shots.
Please refer to the relevant pages for the functions you wish to use.
Refer to the “Contents” when you already know what it is that you want to achieve. If you
want to learn how the KF-90's various buttons work, see “Panel Descriptions.” Also, be sure
to make use of the “Index” at the end of the volume.
Appendices
If the KF-90 does not operate as you expect, read “Troubleshooting” to make sure that your
settings are correct. If an error message appears in the display during operation, consult the
“If this Message Appears on Screen” section to determine the appropriate action. The
appendices also provide other information, including the Tone list, Style list, MIDI
implementation chart, etc.
● Co n ve n tio n s Use d in Th is Ma n u a l
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets“[ ]”, as in [Demo] button.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
• An asterisk (*) or a
at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or
N O TE
precaution. These should not be ignored.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Introduction ................................................................................................................7
Checking the Included Items .................................................................................................................... 8
How to Use This Manual........................................................................................................................... 8
Panel Descriptions...................................................................................................13
Before You Play .......................................................................................................16
Connecting the Power Cord.................................................................................................................... 16
Connecting Pedals.................................................................................................................................... 16
Turning the Power On and Off .............................................................................................................. 17
Adjusting the Sound’s Volume and Brilliance ..................................................................................... 17
Connecting a Microphone....................................................................................................................... 18
About the Touch Screen .......................................................................................................................... 18
Basic Screen .................................................................................................................................... 19
Playing the Keyboard ..............................................................................................22
Listening to the Demo Song.................................................................................................................... 22
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-touch Piano) ...................................................................... 23
Performing with Various Instrument Sounds...................................................................................... 24
Handy Features for Selecting Tones ([Tone Navigator] Button)....................................................... 25
Playing with Accompaniment .................................................................................28
Playing with Automatic Accompaniment ([Style Navigator] Button) ............................................. 28
Recording a Performance .......................................................................................34
Recording a Song ([Composer Navigator] Button) ............................................................................. 34
Recording a Performance with Automatic Accompaniment............................................................. 36
Listening to the Recorded Performance................................................................................................ 38
Using Music Files.....................................................................................................39
Listening to Music Files........................................................................................................................... 39
Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files.............................................................................. 42
Adding the Effects to Your Voice........................................................................................................... 43
Chapter 1 Performance............................................................................................50
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-touch Piano) ...................................................................... 50
Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands (Split Play) ............................................... 55
Selecting a Different Tone in the Current Tone Group ........................................................... 56
Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift) .............................................................. 57
Playing Drum Sounds.............................................................................................................................. 58
Playing Effect Sounds................................................................................................................... 59
Adding Reverberation to Sounds (The Reverb Effect)........................................................................ 59
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Sounding the Metronome........................................................................................................................ 63
Changing the Animation.............................................................................................................. 63
Adjusting the Tempo .................................................................................................................... 64
Changing the Beat of Metronome............................................................................................... 65
Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds........................................................... 65
Changing the Volume................................................................................................................... 66
About Chords............................................................................................................................................ 68
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering ..................................................................................... 68
Displaying the Chord Fingering On Screen (Chord Finder) .................................................. 69
Playing Sounds with the Left Hand Along with the Automatic Accompaniment......................... 72
Playing Just the Rhythm Pattern ............................................................................................................ 73
Adjusting the Tempo for Automatic Accompaniment ....................................................................... 73
Playing a Music Style (Start/ Stop)......................................................................................................... 74
Starting at the Press of a Button .................................................................................................. 75
Adjusting the Timing During a Performance and Starting Over........................................... 75
Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro ................................................................................ 76
Modifying an Accompaniment .............................................................................................................. 77
Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Within a Song (Fill-In)............................................. 77
Adding Harmony to the Right-hand Part (Melody Intelligence)...................................................... 79
Changing the Volume Balance for the Accompaniment and Keyboard .......................................... 81
Adjusting the Volume of Each Performance Part................................................................................ 81
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features............................................................................83
Playing Back Songs for Practice ............................................................................................................. 83
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................................................................................... 85
Determining the Tempo Using the Selected Interval............................................................... 86
Playback with No Change in Tempo..................................................................................................... 87
Counting Down Before a Performance Starts ...................................................................................... 88
Preventing the Part to Be Practiced from Sounding............................................................................ 89
Placing a Marker Within a Song............................................................................................................. 90
Placing/ Erasing a Marker Within a Song ................................................................................. 90
Playback from a Marker Location............................................................................................... 91
Moving a Marker........................................................................................................................... 91
Playing Back to the Same Passage Over and Over .............................................................................. 92
Transposing the Key of the Keyboard (Key Transpose)..................................................................... 93
Transposing a song for playback ........................................................................................................... 94
Checking Your Performance On Screen................................................................................................ 95
Specifying the Part to Display ..................................................................................................... 96
Recording Your Playing with Ease ........................................................................................................ 98
Redoing a Recording.............................................................................................................................. 101
Erasing a Recorded Song....................................................................................................................... 102
Erasing the Sound Recorded at Specific Track Buttons......................................................... 102
Changing How Recording Stops.......................................................................................................... 103
1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups.............................................................................................. 104
Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords (Chord Sequencer)..................................... 105
Creating a Rhythm Part with Ease....................................................................................................... 108
Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)........................................................................................... 109
Saving Your Songs on Floppy Disk .......................................................................................... 111
Changing the Order of Songs on Floppy Disk ................................................................................... 114
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Function ...........................................................115
Selecting the Recording Method .......................................................................................................... 115
Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Location (Loop Recording)..................................... 116
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording) .......................................... 117
Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)............................................................... 118
Recording with the 16 Track Sequencer .................................................................................. 119
Changing the Settings of Each Part...................................................................................................... 120
Composing a Song That Changes the Beat Partway Through......................................................... 122
Changing a Song’s Basic Tempo .......................................................................................................... 122
Changing the Tempo Within the Song................................................................................................ 123
Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song.................................................................... 123
Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure ........................................................................ 123
Chapter 6 Editing Functions .................................................................................124
Canceling an Edit.................................................................................................................................... 124
Copying a Rhythm Pattern ................................................................................................................... 126
Correcting Timing Discrepancies......................................................................................................... 126
Deleting a Specific Measure.................................................................................................................. 127
Inserting a Blank Measure..................................................................................................................... 128
Making a Measure Blank....................................................................................................................... 129
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions.........................................................................132
Saving a User Style................................................................................................................................. 137
Saving on the Floppy Disk......................................................................................................... 137
Deleting a User Style Saved on Floppy Disk .......................................................................... 138
Calling Up User Program ...................................................................................................................... 139
Changing How Button Settings Are Called Up...................................................................... 139
Calling Up Saved User Programs from Floppy Disk............................................................. 140
Erasing a User Program Saved on a Floppy Disk .................................................................. 141
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings..................................................................142
Changing the Settings for One Touch Piano ...................................................................................... 142
Adding Ambience from Different Venues to Songs (Ambience)......................................... 142
Changing the Tuning.................................................................................................................. 143
1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Adjusting Resonance .................................................................................................................. 144
Changing Key Touch (Key Touch) ........................................................................................... 144
Fine Adjustment of the Piano Tone .......................................................................................... 145
Changing the Settings for Automatic Accompaniment.................................................................... 145
Changing the Keyboard’s Split Point....................................................................................... 145
Changing the Chord Tone and Bass Tone............................................................................... 146
Canceling the Chord Intelligence Function............................................................................. 147
Changing the settings for Score screen ............................................................................................... 149
Changing the Tone Set When Playing Back a Song .......................................................................... 149
Changing the Settings for the Marker and the Count Sound .......................................................... 150
Playing the Count Sound at Each Repetition .......................................................................... 150
Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure......................................................................... 150
Adjusting the Standard Pitch (Master Tuning).................................................................................. 151
Changing the Bend Range..................................................................................................................... 152
Changing the Screen Settings ............................................................................................................... 153
Hiding the On-screen Lyrics...................................................................................................... 153
Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen........................................................................................ 153
Maintaining Settings After the Power Is Turned Off (Memory Backup)....................................... 154
Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset)................................................................................... 154
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices..............................................................156
Synchronizing with Connected MIDI Devices................................................................................... 159
Connecting a Computer ........................................................................................................................ 161
Appendices.............................................................................................................162
Tone List....................................................................................................................................... 166
Chord List..................................................................................................................................... 178
Important Notes on Combining the KF-90 and FPS-9 .............................................................. 193
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
● Re a r Pa n e l
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
[Power] Switch
AC Inlet
Pedal Jacks
6
Mic
Volume Knob
2
Mic In Jack
3
When connected to Damper, the pedal functions as a damper
pedal.
7
Line In Jacks
You can connect audio equipment or other digital
instruments and hear them through the KF-90's speakers
When connected to Sostenuto, the pedal functions as a
sostenuto pedal.
8
Line Out Jacks
When connected to Soft, the pedal functions as a soft pedal.
You can use these to play the notes from the KF-90 on an
audio device or record what you play on a tape recorder
4
MIDI Out/In Connectors
Connect between these and external MIDI instruments to
5
Computer
Computer Switch
Switches the connections for the MIDI connectors and the
Also, this switch is set to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the
type computer that's connected.
Computer Connector
You can connect a computer to this jack to exchange
* You can' t use the MIDI Out/In connector and the Computer
connector at the same time.
1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
● Fro n t Pa n e l
6
7
9
10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21
1
2
3
4
5
8
13 14 15 16
22
23
24
1
Disk Drive
11 Bwd[
] Button
You can insert a floppy disk for playing back or saving songs
Rewinds the song.
12 Fwd[ ] Button
Fast-forwards the song.
13 Reset[ ] Button
2
[Volume] Knob
[Brilliance] Knob
[Reverb] Knob
[Balance] Knob
3
Sets the position from which playback will begin to the start
of the song.
4
14 Stop[
] Button
Pressed to stop playback or recording.
5
15 Play[ ] Button
Starts playback or recording for a song.
16 Rec[ ] Button
Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the
6
[Part Balance] Button
Puts the keyboard in record standby mode.
Use this button to adjust the relative volumes of each of the
parts played in the Automatic Accompaniment, the
percussion or effects sounds played with the keyboard, and
Arranger Section
17 Style Orchestrator [-] [+] Buttons
Used to change the arrangement type for automatic
7
[Demo] Button
Press this to hear an internal demo song and to view the KF-
18 [Sync/Reset] Button
This setting simultaneously starts the Automatic
Accompaniment when any key in the left side of the
button while Automatic Accompaniment is being played,
you can restart with the accompaniment synchronized
8
[User Program] Button
Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons. It can
Composer Section
9
[Song/Disk] Button
19 [Count Down] Button
This can be used to make settings for the disk, such as saving
20 Beat Indicator
10 [Composer Navigator] Button
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected
song or accompaniment.
You can select convenient functions for playing back,
21 Tempo [-] [+] Buttons
Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to the
basic tempo.
1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
25
26
27
29 30
34
35 36
28 31 32 33
37
38 39
22 Fill In
30 [Drums/SFX] Button
Changes the keyboard to play percussion and effect sounds
[To Variation] Button
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes
31 [Melody Intelligence] Button
Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard
[To Original] Button
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes
32 [Advanced 3D] Button
When performing along with the automatic accompaniment
or the internal songs, you can add three-dimensional breadth
23 Intro/Ending [1] [2] Buttons
Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment
33 [Vocal Effect] Button
24 [Start/Stop] Button
Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone
Music Style Section
25 Touch Screen
34 Music Style Buttons
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching
26 Value [-] [+] Buttons / Dial
35 [User/Disk] Button
You can use this to change on-screen values or select various
items.
27 [Metronome] Button
36 [Style Navigator] Button
Activates the built-in metronome. And you can change the
Press this button to select convenient functions when
performing with Automatic Accompaniment or when
28 [Transpose] Button
Tone Select Section
29 One Touch Program
[Piano] Button
37 Tone Select Buttons
Selects the kinds of sounds (Tone groups) played by the
Changes the keyboard to a piano sound and makes the
38 [Tone Navigator] Button
You can select convenient functions for selecting tones
[Arranger] Button
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic
39 [Function] Button
1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be fo re Yo u Pla y
fig.00-03.j
In sta llin g th e Mu sic Sta n d
fig.00-01
d
Rolan
Expression Pedal
(EV-5)
Pedal Switch
(DP-6)
When connected to the Damper jack, the pedal can be
used as a damper pedal.
1 . Using the supplied screws, fasten the music stand
to the back of the KF-90 as illustrated.
When connected to Sostenuto, the pedal can be used as a
sostenuto pedal.
Turn the screws clockwise to tighten them.
When connected to Soft, the pedal can be used as a soft
pedal.
2 . To remove the music stand, support it with one
hand while loosening the screws.
* Unplugging a pedal cord from the unit while the power is on
may cause the pedal’s effect to be applied without stopping. Be
sure to switch off the power to the unit before attempting to
disconnect or connect a pedal cord.
* Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music
stand.
* When attaching the music stand, support it firmly with one
hand to make sure that you do not drop it.
Da m p e r Pe d a l
Use this pedal to sustain the sound.
Be careful, so you do not get your fingers pinched.
While the pedal is depressed, long lingering reverberations
continue to be added to the sound after you release from the
keys. When you depress the damper pedal on an acoustic
piano, the sound from the strings that were struck resonates
with other strings, adding rich reverberations and broadness
to the sound. You can adjust this resonance (Sympathetic
Resonance) when the damper pedal is depressed.
● You can vary the amount of resonance applied when the
* Do not apply excessive force to the installed music stand.
Co n n e ctin g th e Po w e r Co rd
fig.00-02.j
Rear Panel
So ste n u to Pe d a l
When this pedal is depressed, reverberations are applied
only to the keys being played at that time.
So ft Pe d a l
This pedal is used to make the sound softer.
Playing with the soft pedal depressed produces a sound that
is not as strong as when otherwise played with the
equivalent strength. This is the same function as the left
pedal of an acoustic piano.
* Be sure to use the supplied power cord.
1 . Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet
● When connected to the Sostenuto jack or the Soft jack, you can
also assign other functions to the connected pedal. For more
● By providing two more pedals, you can use three pedals at the
same time. If you wish to purchase the optional pedal (DP-2/
DP-6), please contact the dealer where you purchased the
keyboard.
on the back of the piano.
2 . Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
Co n n e ctin g Pe d a ls
● You' ll be able to change the pitch smoothly using the "Glide"
EV-5 Expression Pedal (sold separately) to the Sostenuto or
Soft jack. An expression pedal can' t be used to adjust the
volume, however.
1 . Connect the supplied pedals (DP-6) to one of the
pedal jacks.
1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Play
Tu rn in g th e Po w e r O n a n d
O ff
Ad ju stin g th e So u n d ’s
Vo lu m e a n d Brillia n ce
fig.00-07.j
Be sure to follow the steps below when turning the power on
or off. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk
causing malfunction and/ or damage to speakers and other
devices.
Tu rn in g O n th e Po w e r
1 . Before you switch on the power, turn the volume
Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall
down all the way by rotating the [Volume] knob.
fig.00-04
volume level.
Rotating the knob toward the right increases the volume;
rotating it toward the left decreases the volume.
3 . Use the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the overall
sound quality.
Rotating the knob clockwise makes the tone brighter;
rotating it counterclockwise makes the sound more
restrained.
2 . Press the [Power] switch on the back of the unit.
After a few seconds, the unit becomes operable and
playing the keyboard produces sound.
Adjust the volume at appropriate levels.
fig.00-05.j
Co n n e ctin g He a d p h o n e s
Rear Panel
The unit’s speakers will go silent when you plug in
headphones. This makes it convenient for playing at night, or
Lower Position
at other times when you do not want to disturb others.
fig.00-08
ON
* This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval
(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
Tu rn in g O ff th e Po w e r
1 . Plug the headphones into the Phones jack at the
1 . Before switching the power off, turn the volume
front, on the left side of the piano.
all the way down by rotating the [Volume] knob.
The sound from the built-in speakers stops. Now, sound
is heard only through the headphones.
2 . Press the [Power] switch on the back of the unit.
2 . Use the [Volume] knob on the KF-90 to adjust the
The power is switched off.
fig.00-06.j
volume of the headphones.
Rear Panel
● Use Stereo headphones.
So m e N o te s o n Usin g He a d p h o n e s
Upper Position
•
To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones
only by the headset or the plug.
•
The headphones may be damaged if the volume is too
high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the
KF-90 before plugging in the headphones.
OFF
•
To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or
damage to the headphones, the headphones should not
be used at an excessively high volume. Use the
headphones at a moderate volume level.
1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Play
Co n n e ctin g a Micro p h o n e
Ab o u t th e To u ch Scre e n
You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy
The KF-90 makes use of a Touch Screen. This lets you carry
karaoke with the KF-90.
out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen.
fig.00-09
fig.00-10.j
1 . Connect a microphone to the Mic In jack on the
back of the instrument.
Immediately after the power is turned on, this screen
2 . Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob next to the Mic In
jack to adjust the volume level for the
microphone.
* The Touch Screen is operated by touching it with your finger.
Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the Touch
Screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only
your fingers to operate the Touch Screen.
● You can use a microphone (sold separately). When purchasing
a microphone, please consult the vendor where you bought the
KF-90.
* The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced due
to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If
So m e N o te s o n Usin g a Micro p h o n e
•
Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late
at night or early in the morning.
* Do not place items on the touch panel.
•
When connecting a microphone to the KF-90, be sure to
lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when
the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by
the speakers.
•
Howling could be produced depending on the location
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
•
•
Changing the orientation of the microphone.
Relocating microphone at a greater distance from
speakers.
•
Lowering volume levels.
1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Play
● Ba sic Scre e n
The following screen is called “Basic Screen.”
You can usually display this screen by touching <Exit> in the display several times.
If touching <Exit> doesn’t display this screen, follow either of the procedures described
below to display it.
• Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The basic screen appears and displays the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.
• Hold down the One Touch Program [Piano] button and press any one of the Tone
Select buttons, then touch <Exit>.
fig.00-11
Tempo
1
Beat Measure
Tone Part
Name
2
3
4
1
2
Such as the name of the song and Music Style appears.
The Tone names are selected appear.
Information about the Automatic Accompaniment, such as the form of
each of the chords as they are played and icons are shown in the dis-
play. Information about the manner in which the chords are played is
not displayed when Automatic Accompaniment is not being used.
3
4
The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional work like but-
tons. These are called “Icons.”
Using the Main Icons
With the KF-90, you can many other screens besides the basic screen to do things. The
main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.
Some screens consist on two or more pages.
You can display the next page or the previous page of the screen
by touching Page < > or < >.
Touch this to exit the screen that is currently displayed.
You can usually display the Basic screen by touching <Exit> sev-
eral times.
* The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown
by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the
system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always
match what appears in the manual.
1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Play
MEMO
2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g th e Ke y b o a rd
Liste n in g to th e De m o So n g
You can watch the introductions of KF-90’s sound and keyboard, or listen to the demo
songs, which use a variety of the KF-90’s built-in instrument sounds and Music Styles
(accompaniment styles in various musical genres).
fig.Q1-01
1
2 , 3
1 . Press the [Demo] button.
A Demo screen appears.
fig.Q1-02.e
2 . Touch the screen to select the demo type.
Display
Content
Demo Songs
Tones
Demo song performance
Demo performance of the internal tones
Demo performance of the internal Music Styles
Description of the KF-90 piano tones
Styles
Sound
Description of the KF-90 Keyboard (Progressive Hammer
Action)
Keyboard
Score
Description of the scores that can be displayed on the KF-90
By touching <All>, you can view these demos in succession.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Demo screen.
3 . Touch <Exit> at the bottom left of the screen to end the Demo
screen.
2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Keyboard
Pla y in g th e Ke y b o a rd Lik e a Pia n o (O n e -to u ch Pia n o )
First, let’s try piano play.
By pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button you can instantly make the optimal
settings for piano performances.
fig.Q1-03
3
1
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
A Piano screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.Q1-04.e
2 . When you finger the keyboard, the piano sound is produced.
In this way, you can make the settings for piano play at any time using the One Touch
Program [Piano] button.
3 . Touch
or
next to the picture of the piano, then finger the
keyboard.
The amount by which the piano’s top is opened changes, and the sound also changes.
2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Keyboard
Pe rfo rm in g w ith Va rio u s In stru m e n t So u n d s
The KF-90 is able to produce the sounds of various instruments and effects. The various
types of sounds are called “Tones.”
The tones are divided into nine separate groups, each assigned to the Tone Select buttons.
fig.Q1-05
2 , 3
1
1 . Press one of the Tone Select buttons to choose a Tone Group.
The screen shows six of the Tones included in the chosen Tone Group.
fig.Q1-06.e
2 . Touch Page < > < > to switch screens.
The screen changes, and other tones in the selected tone group are displayed.
Choose the tone you want to play.
3 . Touch the screen to choose the tone you want to select.
You can listen to a typical phrase for the Tone by touching <Audition> at the bottom
right of the screen.
When you play the keyboard, the selected tone is played.
Try choosing and playing a variety of different tones.
Ab o u t “ EX” To n e
These are tones that Roland recommends you use in order to enjoy enhanced expressive
capabilities.
Some of the EX Tones change according to the force with which the keys are played
(velocity).
2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Keyboard
Ha n d y Fe a tu re s fo r Se le ctin g To n e s
([To n e N a vig a to r] Bu tto n )
Pressing the [Tone Navigator] button lets you use a handy feature when selecting tones.
fig.Q1-07
2 , 3
1
1 . Press the [Tone Navigator] button.
A Tone Navigator screen like the one below appears.
fig.Q1-08.e
2 . Touch the screen to choose the desired activity.
Display
Description
You can select tones just by touching icons for the suggested
tones, or combination of tones, displayed on the screen.
Check It Out!
After selecting the type of musical instrument and musical
genre, you can then find tones that will sound good with
your selections.
Find Suitable
Index
Allows searching of tones using the first letter of the tone
name.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Tone Navigator screen.
3 . Touch <Exit> at the bottom left of the screen to end the Tone
Navigator screen.
2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Keyboard
Pra cticin g a So n g Usin g Mu sic File s
(Pia n o Ma ste r)
Now, let’s have some fun practicing using the song data on the Data Disk included with
the KF-90.
“Piano Master” can help you master your favorite songs.
You can practice using commercially available Music Files, not just the included disk.
fig.Q1-12
2 , 4 , 5
1
1 . Press the [Function] button.
A Function screen like the one below appears.
fig.Q1-10.e
2 . Touch <Piano Master> on the Touch Screen.
3 . Insert a floppy disk containing a song for practice into the disk
drive.
4 . Follow the on-screen instructions to practice.
5 . Touch <Exit> at the bottom left of the screen to end the Piano
Master.
The Function screen appears.
2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Keyboard
MEMO
2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g w ith Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g w ith Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
([Sty le N a vig a to r] Bu tto n )
Pressing the [Style Navigator] button lets you use a feature that makes play with
automatic accompaniment even more enjoyable.
fig.Q2-01
2 , 3
1
1 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
A Style Navigator screen like the one below appears.
fig.Q1-08.e
2 . Touch the screen to choose the desired activity.
Display
Description
EZ Arranger
Virtual Jam
You can Create a original style (User Style) by using the
Create Style
Chord Finder
You can have the notes comprising the chord be shown in the
screen, whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fin-
gered (p. 69).
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Style Navigator screen.
3 . Touch <Exit> at the bottom left of the screen to end the Style
Navigator screen.
2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with Accompaniment
● En jo y in g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t w ith Ea se (EZ Arra n g e r)
Let’s try playing using Automatic Accompaniment.
Automatic Accompaniment is a feature that creates an accompaniment matched to the
chords you specify with the left hand, making the performance more impressive and
enjoyable.
To use Automatic Accompaniment, you need to press some buttons and make the
settings for Automatic Accompaniment, but EZ Arranger lets you use Automatic
Accompaniment just by answering some onscreen questions.
1 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
The Style Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <EZ Arranger>.
3 . Follow the onscreen instructions.
When you’ve answered all the questions, you can start playing with Automatic
Accompaniment right away.
When specifying the chords yourself in a performance, specify the chords in the left part
of the keyboard, as illustrated below.
fig.Q1-08.e
Split Point (
)
F
3
The range specifyed a chord
4 . Touch <Exit> to end the EZ Arranger.
The Style Navigator screen appears.
● Pla y in g w ith y o u r b a n d (Virtu a l Ja m )
You can select the Pattern to be performed in each Part, and have these played together
just like a backing band. Furthermore, you have complete freedom in combining the
Parts.
1 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
The Style Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Virtual Jam>.
3 . Follow the onscreen instructions.
When you’ve answered all the questions, you can start playing with Automatic
Accompaniment right away.
4 . Touch <Exit> to end the Virtual Jam.
The Style Navigator screen appears.
2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with Accompaniment
Pla y in g w ith a n Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
(O n e -to u ch Arra n g e r)
In this section we will explain how you use Automatic Accompaniment not using [Style
Navigator].
When using Automatic Accompaniment, press the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button. You can make the optimal settings for playing Automatic Accompaniment with
just a single touch of this button.
● Le t’s Try Pla y in g , “ Little Bro w n Ju g ”
Automatic Accompaniment.
In this example we’ll play the song with the “Big Band” Music Style.
You can enjoy a different ambience even with the same song just by changing the Music
Style. Let’s try playing with a wide variety of Music Styles.
fig.Q2-06
7 8 5
3 , 4
1
2
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
fig.Q2-07.e
2 . Press the [Jazz] button.
The following screen appears.
3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with Accompaniment
fig.Q2-07-2.e
3 . Touch Page < > and < > to switch pages, then touch the screen
to choose <Big Band>.
4 . Touch <Exit>.
The previous screen appears.
5 . Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo of the
accompaniment.
Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to the basic tempo.
6 . Finger the “C” key in the following figure to start play.
First an intro of 8 measures is played.
Play the right-hand and left-hand parts of the score on the keyboard.
Play the “C,” “F,” and “G” keys on the keyboard with the timing indicated for “C,” “F,”
and “G” on the next page score for the left-hand part, as shown in the figure. There’s no
need to hold down the key, so you can get ready to finger the next one.
fig.Q2-08.e
C
F
3
G
F
Right
Left
7 . Press the Fill In [To Variation] button with the timing on the score.
The Accompaniment Pattern changes.
Pressing the [To Original] button returns you to the original accompaniment pattern.
Once you’ve familiarized yourself with the performance, try varying the timing for the
accompaniment pattern as you like.
8 . Press the Intro/Ending [1] button with the timing on the score.
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
Pressing the Intro/ Ending [2] button plays a simple ending.
3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with Accompaniment
fig.Q2-09.e
Little Bro w n Ju g
Play the C Key on the
keyboard.
Left
Intro 8 measures
Right
Left
Press the Fill In [To Variation] to change
the Accompaniment Pattern.
Press the Intro/Ending [1]
to sound the Ending.
3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing with Accompaniment
MEMO
3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re co rd in g a Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g a So n g ([Co m p o se r N a vig a to r] Bu tto n )
You can use the KF-90's “Composer” section for simple recording and playback of your
performances.
When recording a song, try pressing the [Composer Navigator] button.
fig.Q3-09
1
2 , 3
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
A Composer Navigator screen like the one below appears.
fig.Q1-08.e
2 . Touch the screen to choose the desired activity.
Display
Description
16 Track
Sequencer
This allows you to record performance for up to 16 parts to
You can create an accompaniment only by entering its chord
progression (p. 105).
Chord Sequencer
Only selecting a rhythm pattern, you can record a rhythm
Rhythm Pattern
Song Edit
You can create songs that have beat changes during the
Beat Map
3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a Performance
Display
Description
You can set a marker at a point within a song and then go
immediately to that measure, and have a count-in be sounded
Maker/Count In
Use this mode when making changes in the recording
method and the manner in which recording is to be stopped
Rec Mode
Play Mode
By changing the settings, you can play back portions of the data
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Composer Navigator screen.
3 . Touch <Exit> at the bottom left of the screen to end the Composer
Navigator screen.
3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a Performance
Re co rd in g a Pe rfo rm a n ce w ith Au to m a tic
Acco m p a n im e n t
In this section, we’ll record a performance with Automatic Accompaniment for “Little
fig.Q3-01
1
7
9 6
2 , 4 , 5
3
4
Get ready to Record
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
The following screen appears.
fig.Q3-02.e
2 . Touch <0:> to display <0:New Song> on the screen.
If <0:> doesn’t appear on screen, touch Page < > and < > to switch screens.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
Get ready to play
3 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
4 . Use the Music Style buttons and the touch screen to choose a
Music Style you want to play.
button, then choose <Big Band>.
3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a Performance
5 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
6 . Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo of the
accompaniment.
Start recording
7 . Press the Rec [
] button.
The KF-90 enters standby for recording.
To stop recording, press the Stop [ ] button.
8 . Play on the left-hand section of the keyboard.
Automatic accompaniment starts, and recording is started at the same time.
Now begin playing.
fig.Q3-03
Stop recording
9 . Press the Intro/Ending [1] button.
An ending is played, then the automatic accompaniment stops, and recording is stopped
at the same time.
● W h e n th e Fo llo w in g Scre e n is Disp la y e d
If there’s song data remaining in the internal memory, the screen shown below appears
when you try to choose a song.
fig.01-55.eps
If y o u d o n ’t w a n t to e ra se th e so n g
Touch <Cancel>.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
Era sin g a so n g
Touch <OK>.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is erased.
3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a Performance
Liste n in g to th e Re co rd e d Pe rfo rm a n ce
Now listen to the performance you have recorded.
fig.Q3-05
1 , 2 , 3
1 . Press the Reset [ ] button.
Now, you can play back the song from the beginning.
2 . Press the Play [ ] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
3 . Press the Stop [ ] button.
Playback stops.
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the
N O TE
KF-90 is turned off. If you don’t want to lose your recorded performance,
save it on a floppy disk. For information on how to save your song, see
If there’s a recorded performance in the KF-90’s internal memory, you can’t
N O TE
3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usin g Mu sic File s
Liste n in g to Mu sic File s
Here’s where you can know how to use the disk drive to listen to commercially available
music files.
You can also listen to KF-90 performance data saved on a floppy disk in the same way.
fig.Q5-01
1 , 2
● In se rtin g a n d Eje ctin g a Flo p p y Disk
If you’re using the disk drive for the first time, be sure to read the important
N O TE
1 . Hold the floppy disk face up, and push it into the disk drive until it
clicks into place.
The disk drive is on the left side of the front panel.
fig.Q5-02.e
Indicator
Eject Button
Floppy Disk
Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress, since that can
damage the magnetic surface of the disk, rendering it unusable. (The disk
drive's indicator will light up at full brightness when the drive is busy
reading or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less brightly lighted,
or be extinguished.)
N O TE
2 . To remove a disk, press the EJECT button.
The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Gently grasp the end of the floppy disk
and pull it out.
3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
● Pla y in g Ba ck Mu sic File s
fig.Q5-03
1
2 6
3 , 4 , 5
1 . Insert the floppy disk containing the songs into the disk drive
2 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
The Song/ Disk screen appears.
fig.Q5-04.e
3 . Touch the screen to choose a song.
If there are more than five songs on the disk, touch Page < > < > to switch the pages.
Touching <
> displays various information about the song you selected.
4 . Touch < > on screen to play back the song.
You can also start playback by pressing Play [ ] button.
The on-screen < > changes to < >.
5 . To stop playback of the song, touch < > on the screen.
You can also stop playback by pressing the Stop [ ] button.
If you let the selected song play to the end, playback stops automatically.
The on-screen < > changes to < >.
6 . Press the Reset [ ] button to go back to the beginning of the song.
When you play a song with an upbeat (in other words, a song that starts before
as the measure numbers.
4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
● W h e n th e Fo llo w in g Scre e n is Disp la y e d
If there’s song data remaining in the internal memory, the screen shown below appears
when you try to choose a song.
fig.Q5-05.e
If y o u d o n ’t w a n t to e ra se th e so n g
Touch <Cancel>.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
Era sin g a so n g
Touch <OK>.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is erased.
● Pla y in g Ba ck All So n g s Co n tin u o u sly (All So n g Pla y )
You can continuously repeat playback of all the songs. This function is called “All Song Play.”
1 . Insert the floppy disk containing the songs into the disk drive.
2 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
fig.Q5-04.e
3 . Touch <
> on the screen.
All songs are played back in sequence. The on-screen < > changes to < >.
When the last song has finished playing, playback then repeats after returning to the first
song.
4 . Press the Stop [ ] button or touch < > on screen to stop
playback of the songs.
4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
En jo y in g Ka ra o k e Pe rfo rm a n ce s w ith Mu sic File s
You can connect a microphone into the Mic jack, and enjoy karaoke with the KF-90.
Karaoke music files must be purchased separately. When purchasing music
files, please consult the vendor where you bought the KF-90.
1 . Connect the microphone, then adjust the volume with the [Mic
Volume] knob on the back of the KF-90.
fig.Q5-06.e
2 . Insert the floppy disk that contains music files into the disk drive.
3 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
The Song/ Disk screen appears.
4 . Touch the screen to choose a song.
5 . If you need to, use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons to adjust the tempo.
6 . If necessary, change the key of the song.
You can transpose a song being played back to match the pitch range of your voice when
7 . Press the Play [ ] button to begin playback of the song.
Sing a song along with music.
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
8 . Press the Stop [ ] button to stop playback.
You can hide lyrics, if you like.
4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
Ad d in g th e Effe cts to Yo u r Vo ice
You can connect a microphone into the Mic jack, and enjoy modifying your voice
through the mic with the KF-90.
fig.Q5-07
2 , 3
1 , 4
1 . Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
A Vocal Effects screen appears.
fig.Q5-08.eps
2 . Touch the screen to choose the desired activity.
Display
Description
Echo
Transformer
Harmonist
You can start a song or Automatic Accompaniment by your
Vocal Count In
Vocal Keyboard
Music Files
Plays the keyboard notes with a voice scale (p. 48).
You can have a specified part played as harmony while a
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
3 . Touch <Exit> to go back the previous screen with the Vocal Effect
function still in effect.
4 . To cancel the Vocal Effects, press the [Vocal Effects] button to go
out the button’s indicator.
4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
● Ad ju stin g th e Ech o
You can adjust the echo added to the sound from a microphone connected to the KF-90.
1 . Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
A Vocal Effects screen appears.
2 . Touch <Echo>.
fig.Q5-09.eps
3 . Touch <Echo> horizontal slider to adjust the amount of echo
applied.
4 . Touch Type <1> or <2> to change the type of echo.
Display
Description
1
2
Adds clear reverberations.
Adds reverberations like a karaoke-type echo.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
● Mo d ify in g Yo u r Vo ice
With the KF-90, you can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone.
This is called the “Voice Transformer” function.
1 . Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
The Vocal Effects screen appears.
2 . Touch <Transformer>.
fig.Q5-10.eps
4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
3 . Touch one of the icons on the screen.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Description
Makes your voice sound like a child’s.
Makes your voice sound like a big animal’s.
Makes your voice sound like a robot’s.
Makes your voice sound like a duck’s.
Makes your voice sound like an alien’s.
Makes your voice sound like computer.
Makes a man’s voice sound like a woman’s.
Makes a woman’s voice sound like a man’s.
4 . Sing through the microphone.
Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected.
When you use the Voice Transformer function, the resonance setting for the
N O TE
5 . Touch the icon you selected in step 3 again to cancel the Voice
Transformer function.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
● Ad d in g Ha rm o n y
You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when you’re playing solo. This is
called the “Harmonist” function.
1 . Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
The Vocal Effects screen appears.
2 . Touch <Harmonist>.
Now you can use the Harmonist function.
fig.Q5-11.eps
3 . Touch one of the icons for <Harmonist> to choose how to apply the
harmony.
Display
Description
This provides an effect similar to that of two people singing a
melody in unison.
This applies a voice modified by Voice Transformer to your own
voice. If you don’t use the Voice Transformer function, this lets
you sing with a voice one octave higher.
This applies a voice modified by Voice Transformer to your own
voice. If you don’t use the Voice Transformer function, this lets
you sing with a voice one octave lower.
When you finger the keyboard, the notes played are added to
your voice as harmony.
This adds a harmony a Major fifth above your own voice.
This adds a harmony a Major 3rd above your own voice.
This adds a harmony a Major fourth below your own voice.
4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
Display
Description
Harmony is added to the chords you play on the keyboard.
When you use the Harmonist function, the resonance setting for the piano
may be canceled.
N O TE
4 . Touch the icon you selected in step 3 again to cancel the Harmonist
function.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
● Sta rtin g So n g a n d Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t b y Vo ca l Co u n t
You can start the song and Automatic Accompaniment by giving the count through the
microphone.
1 . Press [Voice Effects] button.
The Vocal Effects screen appears.
2 . Touch <Vocal Count In>.
fig.Q5-12.eps
3 . Select <Song> or <Arranger>.
Display
Description
After your counting, the Automatic Accompaniment will
start.
Arranger
Song
After your counting, the song will start.
4 . Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the mic.
Be sure to count to four.
The tempo is set to the timing you counted using the microphone.
The song or Automatic Accompaniment will start.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Music Files
● Pla y in g th e Ke y b o a rd N o te s w ith a Vo ice Sca le
You can have the melody that is sung into the microphone played using the KF-90's tones.
N O TE
Transformer or the Harmonist cannot be selected simultaneously.
1 . Press the [Vocal Effects] button.
2 . Touch <Vocal Keyboard>.
If <OFF> icon is selected, touch <ON> to apply the effect.
fig.Q5-13.eps
3 . Touch the one of the icons to select the tone for the keyboard.
Now, you can playing the keyboard notes with a vocal scale. The Tone you’ve selected
is heard when you finger the keyboard.
4 . Touch <OFF> to cancel the Keyboard function.
● Ad d in g th e Ha rm o n y to th e So n g
When you sing along with the playback of a specified part in the song data, harmony is
added using the scale for the specified part.
Both <Music Files> and the Voice Transformer cannot be selected simultaneously.
N O TE
1 . Select a song you want to add the harmony.
If you use the song on floppy disk, insert the floppy disk.
2 . Press [Vocal Effects] button.
3 . Touch <Music Files>.
fig.Q5-14.eps
4 . Touch one of the icons to select a performance part.
A matching harmony is added to the performance of the part you chose.
5 . Touch the icon you selected in step 4 again to cancel the Music
Files function.
4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pla y in g th e Ke y b o a rd Lik e a Pia n o
(O n e -to u ch Pia n o )
You can make the optimal settings for a piano performance at the touch of a
single button.
fig.01-01
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
A Piano screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.01-02.e_70
Since this instrument
faithfully reproduces real
acoustic piano action and
response, sounds in the top
one-and-one-half-octave
range continue to play,
regardless of the damper
pedal action, and the tone
in this range is audibly
different. The Key
can also be used to change
the range that is unaffected
by the damper pedal.
Settings are made for the following situations.
• The Grand Piano sound is selected.
this returns the keyboard to a single section.
• The functioning of the pedals returns the pedals to their usual functions
You can change settings
related to the piano
performance by touching
<Customize> at the bottom
of the screen. For more
information, take a look at
Changing the Piano Sound
1 . Touch
next to the illustration of the piano.
The amount by which the piano’s top is opened changes, and the sound also
changes.
This simulates the sound reflections that occur when the lid of a grand piano
is open.
5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pla y in g a W id e Va rie ty o f In stru m e n t So u n d s
The KF-90 comes with a large number of built-in instrument sounds and
effects. This lets you enjoy performances with sounds matched to a wide
range of musical genres. The various types of built-in sounds are called
“Tones.” The tones are divided into nine separate groups, each assigned to
one of the nine “Tone Select” buttons.
fig.01-03
For more about the names
of Tones, take a look at the
1 . Press one of the Tone Select buttons to choose a Tone Group.
The pressed Tone Select button’s indicator lights.
The screen shows six of the Tones included in the chosen Tone Group.
fig.01-04.e_70
For information on the
Tone Navigator button,
Features for Selecting
Tones ([Tone Navigator]
For information on the
Effects, take a look at the
This screen is called the “Tone Selection” screen.
2 . Use Page < > and < > to switch screens, and touch the
screen to choose a Tone.
The Tone you’ve selected is heard when you finger the keyboard.
Also, the next time you press the Tone Select button you chose in step 1, the
tone you selected here is sounded.
You can audition tones by listening to a typical phrase for the Tone by
touching <Audition> at the bottom right of the screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
About <EX> Tone
These are tones that Roland recommends you use in order to enjoy
enhanced expressive capabilities.
Some of the EX Tones change according to the force with which the keys are
played (velocity).
5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Changing Tones with Value [-] [+] Or the Dial
You can also use Value [-] [+] or the dial to change a Tone. When you use the
Value [-] [+] button or the dial, the pages are switched automatically,
without having to touch Page < > and < >.
fig.01-05
1 . Press one of the Tone Select buttons to choose a Tone Group.
A Tone Selection screen appears.
2 . Use the Value [-] and [+] buttons or the dial to select a Tone.
The indicator for the corresponding Tone Select button blinks.
3 . Finger the keyboard or press the blinking Tone Select button
to decide your selection.
The Tone Select button’s indicator lights up steadily. The Tone you’ve
selected is heard when you finger the keyboard. Also, this is the Tone that
you’ll hear the next time you choose this Tone Select button.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Co m b in in g th e So u n d s o f Tw o In stru m e n ts
(La y e r Pla y )
You can play two different sounds from a single key at the same time. This
method of performance is called “Layer Play.” For instance, it’s possible to
play the Tones for both Piano and Strings in combination.
fig.01-06.e
Gra n d Pia n o 1
Strin g s
1 . At the Basic screen, touch <Layer> at the bottom of the
screen.
fig.01-07.e_70
The screen changes as shown below.
fig.01-08.e_70
This tone displayed in the lower section is called the “Layer Tone.”
When the keys are played, the tone selected in Step 1 and the Layer Tone are
played together.
You can change the volume
level for each of the Tones.
2 . To cancel the Layer Play, touch <Layer> a second time.
When you finger the keyboard, only the sound displayed at the upper area
of the screen is played.
5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Changing the Tones
1 . On the Touch Screen, touch the name of the Tone you want
to change.
fig.01-09.e_70
2 . Press one of the Tone Select buttons.
The Tone Selection screen appears.
3 . Use Page < > and < > to switch screens, and touch the
If you touch <- Oct> and
<+ Oct> at the bottom of
the Tone Selection screen,
the pitch will change in
one-octave steps. To learn
the Keyboard Pitch in
Octave Steps (Octave
screen to choose a Tone.
You can also select a Tone using the Value [-] and [+] buttons or the dial.
4 . Touch <Exit>.
The Basic screen appears.
When you finger the keyboard, the selected Tone and the other Tone are
played.
5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pla y in g Diffe re n t To n e s w ith th e Le ft
a n d Rig h t Ha n d s (Sp lit Pla y )
The Split feature allows you to split the keyboard into two zones, then play
a different sound in each zone.
Such a division of the keyboard into right- and left-hand sections is called a
“Split,” and the key where the division takes place is called the “Split Point.”
The split-point key is included in the left-hand section. Each time power to
You can change the split
point. Please refer to
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.”
fig.01-10.e
Split Point
Aco u stic Ba ss
Gra n d Pia n o 1
When you switch to Split
mode directly from Layer
played in Layer Play
• Switching to Split Play directly from Layer Play
Split Point
become the tone of the
right hand of the keyboard
in Split mode.
Aco u stic Ba ss
Gra n d Pia n o 1
Strin g s
1 . At the Basic screen, touch <Split>.
The tone in the right-hand part remains the same as it was before the
keyboard was split, and the tone in the lower part switches to the tone
displayed on the upper left part of the basic screen.
In this case, the tone in the right portion of the keyboard is called the “Upper
Tone,” and the tone in the left portion of the keyboard is called the “Lower
You can independently
adjust the volume levels of
the notes played by the
upper and lower sections of
the keyboard. Check out
“Adjusting the Volume of
Tone.”
fig.01-11.e_70
When the keyboard has
been divided into upper
and lower sections, the
damper pedal is applied to
only the upper section. If
you want to add lingering
reverberations to the notes
of the lower section, see
2 . To cancel the Split Play, touch <Split>.
The tone in the upper part then is effective for the entire keyboard.
5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Changing the Tones
When the Split Play setting
is in effect, <- Oct> and
<+ Oct> appear at the
bottom of the Tone
1 . On the Touch Screen, touch the name of the Tone you want
to change.
2 . Press one of the Tone Select buttons.
Selection screen. Touching
these changes the pitch of
the keyboard by octaves.
To learn more, check out
“Shifting the Keyboard
The Tone Selection screen appears.
3 . Use Page < > and < > to switch screens, and touch the
screen to choose a Tone.
You can also choose a Tone using the Value [+] and [-] buttons or the dial.
4 . Touch <Exit>.
The Basic screen appears.
Play the keyboard to hear the Tone you selected.
● Selecting a Different Tone in the Current Tone Group
Touching <Split> to cancel
the split function during
AutomaticAccompaniment
activates the Piano Style
Arranger. Take a look at
“Adding Automatic
You can select a tone in the currently selected Tone group without using the
Tone Select buttons.
2 . Touch <Tone> on screen.
Piano Performance (Piano
fig.01-12.e_70
The Tone part name is
displayed at the above or
below the Tone name at the
Basic screen.
The tone selection screen appears.
3 . Touch an icon at the bottom of the screen to switch the Tone
part.
This allow you select a Tone of the Tone part displayed on the icon.
Touching the icon changes the Tone part, and Tone selection screen switches
of the currently Tone Group of the Tone part.
5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
4 . Use Page < > and < > to switch screens, and touch the
screen to choose a Tone.
You can also choose a Tone using the Value [-] and [+] buttons or the dial.
5 . Touch <Exit>.
The Basic screen appears.
Sh iftin g th e Ke y b o a rd Pitch in O cta ve Ste p s
(O cta ve Sh ift)
When the keyboard has been set up so that the right-hand and left-hand
the pitch of the notes you play by an octave at a time. This function is called
“Octave Shift.”
N O TE
You can’t use this feature
when set up so that the
entire keyboard is played
as a single instrument.
For instance, you can make the pitch of the keyboard’s left-hand part match
the pitch of the right-hand part during Split Play. Or, you could change the
pitch of each tone, and play both tones together during Layer Play.
1 . Make sure the Basic screen is displayed.
2 . Touch <Layer> or <Split> to select Layer play or Split play.
3 . Touch the tones on which to use Octave Shift on the touch
screen.
4 . Touch <Tone>.
The Tone Selection screen appears.
5 . Touch <- Oct> and <+ Oct> at the bottom of the screen to
adjust the pitch of the sound.
fig.01-14.e_70
Each touch of <+ Oct> raises the pitch one octave.
Each touch of <- Oct> lowers the pitch one octave.
You can vary the pitch within a range down two octaves or up two. The state
of the pitch is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
6 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.
5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pla y in g Dru m So u n d s
You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects such as sirens
and animal sounds.
fig.01-15
1 . Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.
When you finger the keyboard now, each key plays a different percussion-
The combination of sounds
assigned to the keyboard
varies according to the
drum set. Take a look at the
instrument sound.
fig.01-16.e_70
2 . Touch <Type>
to change the type of drum set.
The drum set appears in the middle of the screen.
Sets of percussion sounds, such as “STANDARD,” are called “Drum Sets.”
Each drum set contains a wide variety of percussive instrument sounds and
sound effects, and each key plays a different sound.
You can play the Drum sound by touching the figure of drum set on the
Drum screen.
3 . Pressing the [Drums/SFX] button again to return to the
previous sound.
The [Drum/ SFX] button’s indicator goes out, and you are returned to the
previous screen.
The sound played with the keyboard reverts to the instrument sound used
before the [Drums/ SFX] button was pressed.
5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Pla y in g Effe ct So u n d s
1 . Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.
2 . Touch <SFX> at the bottom of the screen.
When you finger the keyboard now, each key plays a different effect sound.
You can listen the Sound Effect by touching the icons on the SFX screen.
fig.01-16-2.e_70
For the tones of the SFX set,
A set of effect sounds is called an “SFX set.”
Touching <Drums> at the bottom of the screen makes it so that percussion
instruments are sounded.
3 . Pressing the [Drums/SFX] button again to return to the
previous sound.
The button’s indicator goes out, and the previous screen appears.
The sound played with the keyboard reverts to the instrument sound used
before the [Drums/ SFX] button was pressed.
Ad d in g Re ve rb e ra tio n to So u n d s
(Th e Re ve rb Effe ct)
You can change the type of
reverb that’s applied.
The KF-90 can apply a reverb effect to the notes you play on the keyboard.
Applying reverb adds pleasing reverberation to what you play, so it sounds
almost as if you were playing in a concert hall.
fig.01-17
N O TE
If you press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button for
the purposes of a piano
performance, settings for
the reverb effect that were
made using the [Reverb]
knob could get altered.
1 . Adjust the [Reverb] knob to select the amount of reverb
effect to be applied.
Rotating the knob clockwise applies a deeper reverb, and rotating it
counterclockwise applies less reverb.
5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Effe cts Ad d in g Th re e -Dim e n sio n a l Bre a d th
to Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce s (Ad va n ce d 3 D)
When performing along with the automatic accompaniment or the songs,
you can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds. This provides the
pleasant effect of “wrapping” your performance within the accompaniment.
fig.01-18
1 . Press the [Advanced 3D] button.
The Advanced 3D screen appears in the display.
2 . Touch the window icon to switch the effect on or off.
Three-dimensional breadth is added to the sound of the selected
accompaniment part.
fig.01-19.e_70
Advanced 3D ON
Advanced 3D OFF
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen with the Advanced 3D
function still in effect.
3 . Press the [Advanced 3D] button once more, extinguishing
the button’s indicator, to eliminate the effect.
6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Selecting the part to apply Advanced 3D Effect
With “Keyboard” in Advanced 3D set to On, you can select the Parts to
which the 3D effect is applied when the keys are played.
1 . Touch <Options> at the Advanced 3D screen.
The following display appears.
fig.01-19-2.e_60
Display
Description
All Parts
The effect is applied to all Parts played on the keyboard.
The effect is applied to Layer Part. When the Layer play
is played on the keyboard, even if “Keyboard” is set to
On.
Layer Part
2 . Touch <All Parts> or <Layer Part>.
Touch <Exit> to go back the Advanced 3D screen.
6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Ap p ly in g Effe cts to th e So u n d (Effe cts)
N O TE
You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the
keyboard.
When you press the One
Touch Program [Piano],
you cannot change the type
of effects.
1 . Press one of the Tone Select buttons to choose a Tone to
which you want to apply an Effect.
2 . Touch <Effect> on the screen.
N O TE
The Effect screen appears.
fig.01-20.e_70
If you apply a different
to the Upper tone (the tone
shown in the upper right of
the basic screen), the effect
may not be applied in some
cases. Select the same effect
as for the Upper tone.
For more information on
the different types of
effects, take a look at the
3 . Touch <ON>.
The optimal effect for the keyboard sound is applied.
4 . Touch <Type>
to choose the type of effect.
to adjust the amount of effect
5 . Touch <Depth>
You can select the type of
chorus effect. Please refer
applied.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
6 . To cancel the effect, touch <OFF> at the Effects screen.
About the Effects
When the effects is set to ON, the optimal effect is applied for the currently
selected sound. Also you can apply effects for each tone. Although turning
off the power returns the effects to their initial settings, carrying out
after the power is turned off.
The same effect will apply
to all sounds of the [Voice/
GS] button that are
followed by a “GS” symbol.
If you change the effect for
these sounds, the effect will
also change for other
sounds with the “GS”
symbol.
6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
So u n d in g th e Me tro n o m e
The KF-90 features a built-in metronome functions.
You can start or stop the metronome sound simply by pressing the
[Metronome] button. During playback of a song, or when performing with
automatic accompaniment, the metronome sounds to the tempo and beat of
the song in progress.
fig.01-21
1 . Press the [Metronome] button to start the metronome‘s
sound.
The [Metronome] button’s indicator lights up, and a Metronome screen like
the one below appears.
fig.01-22.e_70
2 . To stop the metronome’s sound, press the [Metronome]
button.
The [Metronome] button’s indicator goes dark.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
● Ch a n g in g th e An im a tio n
A metronome that moves along with the tempo usually is displayed at the
center of the Metronome screen. You can change this to an animated
bouncing ball (a ball that moves along in time with the tempo), or other
animation.
1 . At the Metronome screen, touch the icons at the bottom of
the screen.
The animation type will change.
Metronome
Bouncing Ball
Doctor
6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o
The tempo of the Metronome can be set within the range of 20 to 250. The
tempo of the metronome changes automatically if you use an automatic
accompaniment or play back a song.
fig.03-01
1 . Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.
The setting is at “120” when the KF-90 is powered up.
You can also use the Value [-] [+] buttons or dial to adjust the tempo.
Turn the dial clockwise for a faster tempo, or counterclockwise for a slower
tempo.
● De te rm in in g th e Te m p o w ith Te m p o Ma rk s
You can set the tempo by choosing a tempo indicator, such as “Allegro,”
indicated on the screen.
1 . At the Metronome screen, touch the tempo mark on the
screen.
Even if you touch the bar
graph on the screen
directly, you can still
change the tempo.
The tempo is set to match the tempo mark.
fig.01-23.e_70
6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ch a n g in g th e Be a t o f Me tro n o m e
1 . At the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.
The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen.
When
is selected,
only the upbeat will sound.
2 . Choose the beat from among the selections by touching your
choice.
You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices
for the beat by touching
.
●
Ch a n g in g Ho w th e Me tro n o m e Be a t (Pa tte rn ) So u n d s
The metronome usually sounds one beat per quarter note, but you can
change the beat pattern to sound, for example, one beat for every dotted
quarter note.
1 . At the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.
The available choices for the type of pattern appear at the bottom of the screen.
2 . Choose a pattern from among the selections by touching
your choice.
You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices
for the pattern by touching
Display
.
Description
The metronome sounds in the ordinary way.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of dotted half-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of half-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of dotted quarter-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of quarter-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of dotted eighth-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of eighth-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure,
in intervals of sixteenth-note upbeats.
Plays with backbeats as the added sound.
Plays with triplets as the added sound.
Adds a shuffle.
With a triplet beat (6/ 8, 9/
8, or 12/ 8), added notes are
sounded as triplets.
6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ch a n g in g th e Ty p e o f So u n d
You can change the type of sound of the metronome.
When you turn on the power, the setting is for “ordinary metronome
sound.”
1 . At the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.
The type of sound appear at the bottom of the screen.
2 . Touch the screen to select a metronome sound.
Display
Description
Ordinary metronome sound
Electronic metronome sound
A voice counting “1, 2, 3” in Japanese.
A voice counting “1, 2, 3” in English
Dog and cat cries
Woodblock sound
Triangle and castanet sounds
Clapping
● Ch a n g in g th e Vo lu m e
You can adjust the volume of the metronome to any of ten possible levels.
Metronome volume is set to “
(5)” when the keyboard is turned on.
1 . At the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.
The available choices for the volume level appear at the bottom of the
screen.
2 . Touch the volume icon you like.
Choosing
sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing
sets it
to the highest level.
Choose
to silence the metronome sound.
6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Mu sic Sty le a n d Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
What is Automatic Accompaniment?
With the KF-90, just by pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button,
you can select Automatic Accompaniment. Automatic Accompaniment is a
feature that immediately plays an optimal accompaniment based on the
accompaniment pattern of the Music Style and the chords you finger on the
keyboard. Using Automatic Accompaniment, you can play with an
impressive accompaniment, even when you perform alone. Also, by
varying the Music Style, accompaniment pattern, and chords, you can easily
enjoy a wide range of arrangements of the same song.
What’s a Music Style?
A Music Style is an accompaniment style that has been designed to fit in
with a particular musical style.
There are many different varieties of music around the world, and each one
has its own unique features. What gives jazz its “jazziness” and classical
music its unmistakable classical feel is the unique combination of elements,
such as the instruments used, melody, and phrasing, which interact to create
the musical character of the genre. A Music Style makes use of such
elements to bring out the distinctive atmosphere and mood of each musical
genre.
Th e Ma k e u p o f a Mu sic Sty le
A Music Style is made up of a set of six performance states called
“Divisions.”
Division
Description
Intro
This is the state when an intro is playing.
This is the state where an Original accompani-
ment pattern is played.
Original
This is the state where a Variation accompani-
ment pattern is played.
Variation
Fill In to Original
Fill In to Variation
Ending
This is the state where a Variation fill-in is played.
This is the state where an Original fill-in is played.
This is the state where an ending is played.
Also, a Music Style is made up of five performance parts: “Rhythm,” “Bass,”
“Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment 2,” and “Accompaniment 3.”
6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ab o u t Ch o rd s
A chord is a group of notes played at the same time. The pitch of the note
that forms the base (the root note) is shown by a letter, and the type of
constituent notes is shown by the chord type.
For instance, the chord “C Maj” has C (do) as the root note, and “Maj” (major)
as the chord type. C Maj is composed of the three notes “C,” “E,” and “G.”
fig.02-C1.e
CMaj
Chord Type
Root Tone
C
E
G
For more information
about chord fingering, refer
The root notes of chords are all indicated by a letter of the alphabet,
(sharp) and (flat), which correspond as follows.
fig.02-C2.e_90
● Pla y in g Ch o rd s w ith Sim p le Fin g e rin g
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently decides on
accompaniment chords the moment you play a key (root note) specifying a
chord during automatic accompaniment.
You can cancel the Chord
Intelligence function. For
more information, see
“Canceling the Chord
To play a C Maj chord, for example, you usually have to finger the three
keys C, E, and G; but with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C
key to initiate a C Maj chord accompaniment.
fig.02-C3.e
• How to play the chord in the Chord Intelligence mode
Major
Minor
Ex:
Ex: C min
C Maj
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Play the chord root.
Minor Sevinth
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Ex: C min 7
Play the root,
Play the root and
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
the second key above it.
Major Seventh
Diminished
Ex: C Maj 7
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
the first key below it.
Play the root and
the sixth key above it.
6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
●
Disp la y in g th e Ch o rd Fin g e rin g O n Scre e n (Ch o rd Fin d e r)
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can have the
notes comprising the chord be shown in the screen.
1 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
The Style Navigator screen will appear.
fig.02-02.e_70
2 . On the screen, touch <Chord Finder>.
3 . Touch the screen to specify the root of the chord you want to
learn about.
The chord fingering appears on screen.
fig.02-03.e_70
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ch o o sin g a Mu sic Sty le
For more information
You can choose a wide variety of Music Styles by pressing the Music Style
about the types of Music
Styles, take a look at the
button. The following buttons are called Music Style buttons.
fig.02-04
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to change the
Music Style, the played notes and tempo of the right-hand part of the
keyboard change to the optimal Music Style, and the settings that let you
play with Automatic Accompaniment are made right away.
For information on the
Style Navigator button,
with Automatic
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
Accompaniment ([Style
2 . Press the Music Style button to choose the group for the
Music Style.
fig.02-05.e_70
3 . Press Page < > and < > and the Touch Screen, the Value
When you change the
[-] [+] buttons, or the dial to choose a Music Style.
When you use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial, the pages are switched
automatically, without having to touch Page < > and < >.
Music Style, the tempo and
Tone change to match the
Music Style you’ve chosen.
If you don’t want to change
the tempo and Tone, take a
Tone and Tempo When the
Music Style Changes” (p.
4 . Touch <Preset A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> on the screen.
When you choose any one of <Preset A> through <D>, the Music Style’s
tempo, the tone of the right-hand part, the settings of the Style Orchestrator
By varying the tempo or Tone, you can enjoy performances with a totally
different ambience, even when the Music Style is the same.
5 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.
6 . Specify a chord by playing it on the left-hand keyboard
section.
Automatic Accompaniment of the selected Music Style is played.
You can change the split
point. Please refer to
fig.02-05-2.e
Split Point (
)
F
3
The range specifyed a chord
7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
7 . Press the Intro/Ending [1] or [2] button to play an ending and
stop performance of the accompaniment.
There are some ways how
this starting and stopping
● Ch o o sin g a Mu sic Sty le fro m Da ta Disk
You can use Music Styles on the Data Disk included with the KF-90, as well
fig.02-06
1 . Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
2 . Press the [Disk/User] button.
The following screen will appear.
fig.02-07.e_70
3 . Touch Page < > or < > and the Touch Screen to choose a
Music Style.
Touch Page < > several times to display the Music Styles stored in internal
memory.
Styles with numbers that begin with “L” are Styles stored in internal
memory.
4 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
You can save three User
Styles on the [Disk/ User]
button (the internal
When you specify a chord in the lower section of the keyboard, the music
style you’ve chosen will be sounded.
memory) of the KF-90.
The Music Style you’ve selected from the floppy disk remains in memory
until you switch off the power. You can play the Music Style you last
selected just by pressing the [Disk/ User] button, even if you’ve taken the
floppy disk out of the disk drive.
7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g So u n d s w ith th e Le ft Ha n d
Alo n g w ith th e Au to m a tic
Acco m p a n im e n t
Ordinarily, when you perform while using the Automatic Accompaniment,
no sound is produced from keys in the left part of the keyboard when they
are pressed. When you touch the <Lower> icon, though, you can play the
tone in the left side of the keyboard while simultaneously having the
Automatic Accompaniment play.
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The Basic screen appears.
2 . Touch <Lower> on the screen.
The screen changes as shown below.
3 . Specify a chord by playing it on the left-hand keyboard
section.
When changing the tone in
the left portion of the
keyboard (the lower part),
Automatic Accompaniment is played.
4 . To cancel the Lower part sound, touch <Lower>.
7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g Ju st th e Rh y th m Pa tte rn
A Music Style can be made to sound only the Rhythm Pattern.
N O TE
There are any patterns in
the Music Styles that are
not included in the Rhythm
Patterns. In certain cases,
such as when such Music
Styles are selected, the
Rhythm Pattern may not
play.
1 . Choose a Music Style.
2 . Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
3 . Press the [Start/Stop] button.
Only the Rhythm Pattern of the selected Music Style is played.
Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o fo r Au to m a tic
Acco m p a n im e n t
fig.02-08
1 . Select the Music Style, then press the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button.
This makes the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
2 . Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo.
The tempo appears at the top-left area of the screen.
Pressing the [+] button makes the tempo faster, and pressing [-] makes the
tempo slower.
You can change the tempo
of Automatic
Accompaniment even
while the automatic
accompaniment is playing.
You can return to the original tempo for the Music Style by pressing [-] and
[+] at the same time.
You can also change the tempo using the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial.
7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g a Mu sic Sty le (Sta rt/ Sto p )
Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for
the accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when
you play something in the lower section of the keyboard), and makes the
setting for automatically playing an appropriate intro for the
accompaniment. You can change how this starting and stopping works.
fig.02-09
● Sta rtin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t W h e n Yo u
Pla y th e Le ft-h a n d Se ctio n (Sy n c Sta rt)
1 . Press the [Sync/Reset] button, getting the button indicator to
light.
The Intro/ Ending [1] button’s indicator will flash.
2 . Specify the chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
The intro is played and the automatic accompaniment starts.
Changing the Intro
Before starting automatic accompaniment, you can follow the steps shown
below to change or silence the intro.
Sta rtin g W ith o u t a n In tro
Press the Intro/ Ending [1] button, extinguishing the indicator, then specify
the chord.
Sta rtin g w ith a Sim p le Ad d e d In tro
Press the Intro/ Ending [2] button, getting the indicator to start blinking.
Then, specify the chord.
7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Sta rtin g a t th e Pre ss o f a Bu tto n
1 . Press the [Sync/Reset] button, extinguishing the indicator.
The indicator for the Intro/ Ending [1] button also goes dark.
2 . Specify the chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
Fingering a key on the left-hand section of the keyboard while the [Sync/
Reset] button’s indicator is dark causes a chord to be sounded.
This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and the root of the chord that is played
at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”
You can change the sound
of the chord tone and bass
tone. Take a look at
3 . Press the Intro/Ending [1] or [2] button, or the [Start/Stop]
button.
The automatic accompaniment starts.
Pressing the [Start/ Stop] button starts the automatic accompaniment
without an intro. Pressing the Intro/ Ending [2] button plays a simple intro.
● Sto p p in g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Stopping with an Added Ending
1 . Press the Intro/Ending [1] or [2] button.
An ending is played, then the automatic accompaniment stops.
Pressing the Intro/ Ending [2] button plays a simple ending.
Stopping at the Press of a Button
1 . Press the [Start/Stop] button.
Automatic accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.
● Ad ju stin g th e Tim in g Du rin g a Pe rfo rm a n ce a n d
Sta rtin g O ve r
If the timing of the accompaniment is off during a performance, pressing
fig.02-10
1 . Press the [Sync/Reset] button.
The count sound begins immediately, then the accompaniment starts.
7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g th e Co u n t So u n d a t th e En d o f th e In tro
If an intro is played before your performance, you can have the count sound
played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you
are to start playing.
fig.02-12
1 . Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.
2 . Press the Intro/Ending [1] or [2] button.
The intro starts, and the count sound plays to the end of the intro.
If the [Sync/ Reset] button’s indicator is lit, specifying a chord in the left-
hand area will cause the intro to start, and a count to sound in the same way.
fig.02-11.e
When the intro has finished playing,
the accompaniment is played.
Ex: 4/4
Intro
~
1
2
3
4
Count Sound
3 . To stop the count sound, press the [Count Down] button,
extinguishing its indicator.
7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Mo d ify in g a n Acco m p a n im e n t
You can change the arrangement of automatic accompaniment and the
accompaniment pattern.
● Ch a n g in g th e Acco m p a n im e n t Pa tte rn W ith in a
So n g (Fill-In )
There are two accompaniment patterns: the original one, and a variation
that’s a little more flowery. In addition, a fill-in (a short phrase) is added at
the points where the accompaniment patterns change, which adds more
variation to the song. It can be effective to use the quieter original pattern for
You can change the
accompaniment pattern
without inserting a fill-in.
In that case, assign the
function to the pedal and
the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second half.
fig.02-13
1 . Pressing the Fill In [To Variation] button (its indicator
should light) makes the setting for playing the variation
accompaniment pattern.
2 . Pressing the Fill In [To Original] button (its indicator should
light) makes the setting for playing the original
accompaniment pattern.
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in in time
with when the buttons were pressed, and the accompaniment pattern
changes.
W h a t’s a “ Fill-In ” ?
A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill-In.”
The KF-90 plays the optimal phrase for the selected Music Style.
Adding a Fill-in Without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
You can play a fill-in without changing the accompaniment pattern by
pressing whichever of the Fill In [To Original] and FIll In [To Variation]
buttons that is flashing while a performance is in progress.
7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
●
Ch a n g in g th e Arra n g e m e n t o f th e Acco m p a n im e n t
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment during the
performance of automatic accompaniment or while it is stopped. This
function is called “Style Orchestrator.” There are four arrangement types of
the accompaniment for each Music Style.
fig.02-14
1 . Press the Style Orchestrator [-] or [+] button to change the
arrangement of the accompaniment.
Pressing the [-] button provides a simpler arrangement; press the [+] button
for a more elaborate arrangement.
The value for “Style Orch” in the basic screen changes.
fig.02-14-2.e_70
N O TE
Some Music Styles don’t
change the arrangement of
the accompaniment when
you’ve followed the steps
just described.
Display
Basic
Adv1
Adv2
Full
Description
The simplest arrangement
A more elaborate arrangement
The most elaborate arrangement
7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ad d in g Ha rm o n y to th e Rig h t-h a n d Pa rt
(Me lo d y In te llig e n ce )
You can add a harmony to the notes you play with the keyboard.
While an automatic accompaniment is playing, a harmony matched to the
chord you designate in the lower section of the keyboard is automatically
added to the notes you play on the upper section. This function is called
“Melody Intelligence.”
fig.02-15
1 . Press the [Melody Intelligence] button, getting its indicator
to light up.
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, a
harmony is added to the notes you finger.
A Melody Intelligence screen like the one following appears.
fig.02-16.e_70
2 . Use Page < > < > and the Touch Screen, the Value [-] [+]
N O TE
buttons, or the dial to choose a Harmony type.
When you play something on the keyboard, a harmony of the type you
selected is added to the notes you finger.
The different types of
harmonies include some
that automatically change
the Tone. Also, when you
finger several keys at the
same time, harmony is
added to one note.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen with the Melody Intelligence
function still in effect.
3 . To cancel the Melody Intelligence function, press the
[Melody Intelligence] button to extinguish the indicator.
7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ad d in g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t to Re g u la r
Pia n o Pe rfo rm a n ce (Pia n o Sty le Arra n g e r)
Usually, with an automatic accompaniment performance, the
accompaniment is sounded by the chords you specify on the left-hand
section of the keyboard, with the melody played on the right-hand section.
If you like, however, you can make the KF-90 recognize chords from the
entire keyboard, and perform without splitting the keyboard. This function
is called the “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play
a song by fingering chords, without giving any thought to the location of a
keyboard split.
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
2 . Touch <Split> to cancel the Split Play.
fig.02-17.e_60
3 . Use the Music Style button and Touch screen to choose a
Music Style.
4 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.
5 . Finger the keyboard.
The accompaniment starts when you finger a chord.
8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ch a n g in g th e Vo lu m e Ba la n ce fo r th e
N O TE
Acco m p a n im e n t a n d Ke y b o a rd
When the [Balance] knob is
all the way to “Accomp,”
no sound is heard when
you finger the keyboard.
You can usually leave the
knob at the center position.
You can change the volume balance for the song and accompaniment and
the notes played from the keyboard.
1 . Use the [Balance] knob to change the volume balance.
Rotating the knob toward “Accomp” lowers the volume of the keyboard.
Rotating the knob toward “Keyboard” lowers the volume of the song.
fig.02-18
Ad ju stin g th e Vo lu m e o f Ea ch Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa rt
You can adjust the volume balance of each part of the Music Style and of
each tone when playing more than one tone with the keyboard.
fig.02-19
1 . Press the [Part Balance] button.
The Part Balance screen will appear.
The Part Balance screen is made up of two pages.
fig.02-20_60/fig.02-21_60
This shows the volume balance of each part of the Music Style.
Display
Performance part
Rhythm
Bass
Rhythm
Accomp
Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and Accompaniment 3
8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
fig.02-20_60/fig.02-21_60
This shows the volume balance of each keyboard tone during Layer play or
Split play, or when playing percussion or effect sounds with the keyboard.
Volume of percussion instruments/ effects played with
Drs/SFX
Lower
Layer
Upper
2 . Touch
to adjust the volume of the respective Parts.
You can adjust the volume by touching the each slider on-screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Pla y in g Ba ck So n g s fo r Pra ctice
Let's try practicing along with commercial music files or songs recorded on
floppy disk.
You can move to a certain measure within a song, and play back the song
from that location.
fig.03-08
2 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
A Song/ Disk screen appears.
fig.03-09-2.e_60
If there is song data in the
KF-90’s internal memory,
the “Delete song” message
appears. For more
3 . Touch the screen to choose a song.
You can also use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to choose a song.
4 . Touch <Exit> several times.
Display the screen where the measure number appears in the top-right area
of the screen.
N O TE
When you start playback of
Music Files, the measure
number on the Basic screen
appears in reverse video.
While this is in reverse
video, the KF-90 is reading
data from the floppy disk,
so wait a few moments
until it finishes.
5 . Press the Play [ ] button to play back the song.
6 . Press the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons to move to a bar
where you want to listen.
Pressing the button once moves your position by one measure. Hold down
the button to move forward or backward continuously.
7 . To stop playback of the song, press the Stop [ ] button.
8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
To go back to the beginning of the song
N O TE
If you’ve used markers to
designate a passage for
only move forward and
backward within the range
specified by the A and B
markers.
1 . Press the Reset [ ] button.
To move to the end of the song
1 . Hold down the Stop [ ] button and press the Fwd [
]
button.
● Disp la y in g th e Sco re
You can have the musical score of a recorded performance or a song from
floppy disk be displayed.
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
The Song/ Disk screen appears.
2 . Touch the screen to choose a song.
You can also use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to choose a song.
3 . Touch <Score> on the screen.
The Score screen appears.
If touching
can't
fig.
display the lyrics when
playing the Music Files
containing the lyric data,
the setting on the lyric is
OFF. Turn ON the setting
No notes appear in the
musical score when you
select a part that contains
no performance data.
Icon
Description
The expanded score is displayed.
Touch
to change to
another part.
Refer to “Changing the
Lyrics are displayed on the score.
Your performance data is displayed.
The left-hand part is displayed.
For more information
about a part, refer to
“Multitrack Recording with
The right-hand part is displayed.
The both-hands part is displayed on the grand staff.
8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Icon
Description
You can change the setting of the part displayed or the
4 . Press the Play [ ] button.
The song play back starts, and the score moves with the tune.
Touching the illustration of speaker ( ) on-screen, you can mute the part.
So m e n o te s o n a Sco re Scre e n
•
When you start playback of music files, the
marks appears. While this appears on the
score, the KF-90 is reading data from the floppy disk and making the score. Please wait until
reading of the data is complete.
•
•
In the Score screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not
be displayed.
The scores that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing
ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, high-level music.
Because of this, you may find that the score shown in the display does not match what is
provided on commercially available sheet music. The score display feature is particularly
unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation.
In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.
If you use the icons on-screen to change the displayed part while the song is playing, the song
may be played back from the beginning.
•
Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o
With songs that are difficult to play because their tempo is too rapid, you
may find it helpful to first practice the song with the tempo slowed down.
Then, after becoming more familiar with the song, you can practice it at a
gradually faster tempo.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can
change the tempo even when the song is in progress.
fig.03-01
Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo.
• Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding
down the button makes the tempo change (speed up) continuously.
• Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding
down the button makes the tempo change (slow down) continuously.
• Press [-] and [+] at the same time to return to the original tempo.
8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Adjusting the tempo with the Value [+] and [-] buttons or the dial
When the tempo is displayed at the upper-left area of the screen, you can use
the dial to adjust the tempo.
• Turn the dial clockwise to speed up the tempo.
• Turn the dial counterclockwise to make the tempo slower.
• The Value [-] [+] buttons do the same thing as the Tempo [-] [+] buttons.
● De te rm in in g th e Te m p o Usin g th e Se le cte d
In te rva l
You can set the tempo according to the timing with which you tap the screen
or the timing at which you count into the microphone. This feature is called
“Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the
tempo you are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical
When using your voice to
set the tempo, be sure to
connect a microphone
(optional) to the KF-90.
For more on connecting a
microphone, refer to
terms.
fig.03-02
1 . Press the [Metronome] button.
The Metronome screen appears.
2 . Touch <Tap Tempo>.
The following screen appears.
fig.03-03.e_70
N O TE
Tapping the “Tap Pad” too
forcefully may damage the
Touch Panel. Make sure not
to use too much force when
tapping the button.
3 . Either lightly tap the “Tap Pad” on the screen, or count “1, 2,
You can count in with the
microphone and start the
song with the tempo you
counted. For details, refer
3, 4” into the microphone.
The tempo is set to the timing you used when tapping the Tap Pad or
counting into the microphone.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Metronome screen.
8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Pla y b a ck w ith N o Ch a n g e in Te m p o
If a song has difficult tempo changes, it can be effective to practice the song
first at an unchanging tempo. Playback of a song at a steady tempo that
doesn’t change is called “Tempo Muting.”
1 . Hold down the Stop [ ] button and press either the Tempo
[-] or [+] button.
2 . Press the Play [ ] button.
Now, songs are played back at an unchanging tempo.
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.
fig.03-04.e_60
3 . To cancel tempo muting, hold down the Stop [ ] button
and press either the Tempo [-] or [+] button.
Tempo muting is canceled.
Tempo muting is also canceled if you select another song.
8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Co u n tin g Do w n Be fo re a Pe rfo rm a n ce Sta rts
When you’re playing along with a song, you can make sure that your
playing is in time with the song by sounding a count before the song starts
playing.
This audible count before the playback of a song is called a “Count-In.”
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Marker/Count In>.
The Marker screen appears.
3 . Touch the <Count In> icon.
With this setting, two measures are counted down before song playback
starts.
fig.03-05.e_70
You can change the
number of measures
counted and the type of
sound that you hear. See
“Changing the Number of
4 . To stop the count-in sound, touch the <Count In> icon.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Pre ve n tin g th e Pa rt to Be Pra ctice d
fro m So u n d in g
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, you can play back
To learn more about music
the part for each hand individually. Playing the internal song’s right-hand
part with your right hand, and the song’s left-hand part with your left hand
allow you to practice each hand’s part separately.
For instance, a music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track
buttons as shown below.
fig.03-06.e
Rhythm/
SFX
Accompani- Left-hand Right-hand
ment Part Part Part
By using these Track Buttons, you can play back with the sound of a specific
part removed.
The removal of this specific part’s sound is referred to as “muting.”
By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion,
you can mute the parts the same way.
A Track button has
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button to choose the song.
performance data when
<
> appears under
2 . Touch <Track> to display the five Track buttons.
it.
The 5 Track buttons screen appears.
Track buttons for which
> is displayed have
fig.03-07.e_70
<
no performance data.
If a single Track button
includes more than one
instrument, and you want
to mute out just one of
those instruments, take a
3 . Touch the Track button for the part you will play yourself.
The display for the Track button you chose changes to
.
The sound of the Track button you chose is muted out.
Touch the same Track button again to cancel muting. You can set and cancel
mutes even while songs are being played.
You can change the volume
balance for the keyboard
and the song. Check out
“Changing the Volume
4 . Press the Play [ ] button to start playback.
No sound is played from the selected tracks. Practice along with the
playback of other Parts.
5 . To stop playback, press the Stop [ ] button.
Accompaniment and
8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Pla cin g a Ma rk e r W ith in a So n g
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly,
you can then easily move and repeatedly play back the selected measures.
● Pla cin g / Era sin g a Ma rk e r W ith in a So n g
You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song.
The marker is placed at the beginning of the bar. Placing markers is a handy
way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like.
You can also add markers
or move to a marker even
while playback is in
progress.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Marker/Count In>.
The Marker screen appears.
fig.03-05.e_60
A marker is normally
placed at the beginning of
the measure, but you can
also place a marker at a
position part way through
a measure. Take a look at
“Placing a Marker in the
3 . Use the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons to move to the bar
where you want to place the marker.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the screen.
4 . Touch <---> for Marker <A>.
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the bar you moved to.
<---> in the screen will change to the number of the measure where you
placed the marker.
N O TE
You cannot place both
marker A and marker B at
the same location. Also,
you cannot place marker B
at a position earlier than
marker A.
5 . In the same way, move a position and touch <---> for Marker
<B> to place Marker B.
When you’ve placed a marker, the number of the measure with the marker
appears on screen.
Erasing a Marker
1 . At the Marker screen, touch <Clear> for the marker you want
to erase.
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <--->.
9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
● Pla y b a ck fro m a Ma rk e r Lo ca tio n
1 . At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the
marker you want to move to.
The position from which playback will start is moved to the location where
marker A or marker B is set.
2 . Press the Play [ ] button to play back the song from the
marker location.
You can move to a marker location and continue playback from there by
touching measure number for <A> or <B>, even during playback of the
song.
● Mo vin g a Ma rk e r
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song.
You can move the entire segment between Marker A and Marker B forward
or back, without changing the interval itself.
1 . Touch <
> or <
> to move to where you want to place
the marker.
fig.03-11.e
Touch <
> to move toward the beginning of the song.
> to move toward the end of the song.
Touch <
Moving <A-B>
As an example, let’s suppose that marker A is at the start of the fifth measure
and marker B is at the start of the ninth measure.
• Touch <
> to shift marker A to the beginning of the first measure
and marker B to the beginning of the fifth measure.
fig.03-14.e_80
Mesure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
1 6
Marker A
Marker B
• Touch <
> to shift marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure
and marker B to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
fig.03-15.e_80
Measure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
1 6
Marker A
Marker B
9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Pla y in g Ba ck to th e Sa m e Pa ssa g e
O ve r a n d O ve r
You can play back a particular passage repeatedly. This is convenient when
you want to practice the same passage a number of times.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Marker/Count In>.
The Marker screen appears.
3 . Place markers A and B to enclose the passage you want to
For more info about
repeat.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth
through eighth measures over and over. You should place marker A in the
fifth bar and marker B in the ninth bar.
4 . Touch the <Repeat> icon.
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to
marker B.
fig.03-13.e
5 . Press the Play [ ] button.
The passage from marker A to marker B is played repeatedly.
• If you don’t place any markers, playback repeats from the beginning to
the end of the song.
• If you only place marker A, playback repeats from marker A to the end
of the song.
• If you only place marker B, playback repeats from the beginning of the
song to marker B.
6 . Press the Stop [ ] button to stop playback of the song.
To cancel the setting for repeated playback, touch the <Repeat> icon in the
Marker screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Composer Navigator screen.
9 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Tra n sp o sin g th e Ke y o f th e Ke y b o a rd
(Ke y Tra n sp o se )
You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the
position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called “Key
Transpose.”
In situations such as when providing accompaniment to a song, using the
Key Transpose function to match the singer’s vocal register lets you easily
transpose the sounds without changing the score.
fig.03-16
1 . Press the [Transpose] button.
A Transpose screen like the one below appears.
fig.03-17.e_70
2 . Touch
.
The notes you play with the keyboard are transposed.
3 . Choose the value for transposition by touching
or
on the screen.
Each touch of
or
transposes the key by a semitone.
You can also change the transpose value using the Value [-] [+] buttons or
the dial.
The setting range is from -6 to 0 to +5.
The [Transpose] button’s indicator goes off when the value is “0.”
N O TE
4 . Touch
to return the keyboard transposition to the
The transposition setting
returns to its original value
when switch off the power
or choose another song.
original key.
The [Transpose] button’s indicator then goes out.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
9 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
<Ex a m p le >
In this example, we’ll consider the C note in the key of C major to be the
basic note. Counting from the tonic to the major third of C (E), there are four
keys, including the black keys, so set the value to “+4.”
fig.03-18
If you play C E G
It will sound E G#
B
Tra n sp o sin g a so n g fo r p la y b a ck
You can transpose a song for playback.
When using your own recorded performances or songs from music data
while playing ensemble with another instrument, you can easily transpose
the playback pitch to match the pitch of the other instrument.
1 . Press the [Transpose] button.
The Transpose screen appears.
2 . Touch
.
3 . Choose the value for transposition by touching
or
on the screen.
Each press of
or
transposes the key by a semitone.
You can also change the transpose value using the Value [-] [+] buttons or
the dial.
You can transpose the song within a range of -24 to 24 semitones.
4 . Touch
to return the song transposition to the original key.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
Transposing Both the Keyboard Notes and the Song
N O TE
1 . At the Transpose screen, touch
.
The transposition setting
returns to its original value
when switch off the power
or choose another song.
Both the sounds played with the keyboard and the those in the song being
played back are transposed.
The setting range at this time is from -6 to 0 to +5.
9 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
Ch e ck in g Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce O n Scre e n
You can play back a Music Files song or a previously recorded model song and
compare your own performance with the screen as you play back the song.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
The Function screen appears.
2 . Touch <Piano Partner>.
A Keyboard screen or Graph screen like the one shown below is displayed.
You can switch between the two screens by touching <Graph> or
<Keyboard> at the bottom of the screen.
N O TE
If the upper screen doesn’t
change when you play back
a song, the part settings
displayed in the upper
screen do not match. Take a
make the settings for the
part to display.
With either screen, the upper portion shows the playback of the song, and
the lower portion shows what’s played on the keyboard.
Th e Ke y b o a rd Scre e n
fig.03-20_60
When this screen is visible, you can check the pitch.
The key for the note being played is indicated.
Th e Gra p h Scre e n
fig.03-21_60
When this screen is visible, you can check a note’s velocity and length.
The height shows the note’s velocity, and the width shows the note’s length.
3 . Play back the song, and try playing along with it.
Now let’s check your performance on the screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
9 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So m e Ha n d y Fe a tu re s
● Sp e cify in g th e Pa rt to Disp la y
You can display a different Part of the model song.
1 . At the Keyboard screen or the Graph screen, touch
<Options>.
fig.03-22.e_70
2 . Touch
to switch the Part that’s displayed.
Setting
Lower Screen
Value
For more information
about Parts, refer to
“Multitrack Recording with
Keyboard, Whole Track, Parts 1–16, OFF
Upper Screen (Left)
Upper Screen (Right)
Lower Track, Parts 1–16, OFF
Upper Track, Parts 1–16, OFF
The upper display can show two parts simultaneously.
When the power is turned on, this is set to display the “Lower Track” and
“Upper Track” simultaneously, but you may select parts 1–16 as necessary.
When <Keyboard> is selected in the Lower Screen, the keyboard
performance appears.
After recording your performance, if you want to compare it with the model
performance again, all you have to do is to choose the part where you
recorded your performance.
3 . When you’re done making the settings, touch <Exit>.
You are returned to the previous screen.
9 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
What is a Track Button?
A recorded performance is automatically assigned to 5 Track buttons.
The Track buttons appear in the display whenever a performance is being recorded or
played back.
Track button name
Performance recorded
The Rhythm Part of an Automatic Accompaniment is
recorded here. When a Tone set such as a drum set or an SFX
set has been chosen (p. 58), it is also recorded here.
The performance of the entire keyboard is recorded. Perfor-
mances without Automatic Accompaniment are normally
is recorded here.
The Bass Part of an Automatic Accompaniment and the Accom-
paniment Part are recorded here.
With Automatic Accompaniment set to play along with the
own performance with the left hand is recorded.
recorded.
Displaying the Track buttons
Track buttons appear on the touch panel when needed, and let you perform a wide
variety of operations such as recording and playing back performances.
To display the Track buttons, press the [Song/Disk] button, and touch
<Track> on the Song/Disk screen.
With songs in the KF-90's internal memory, the Track buttons are shown when the Rec
[
] button is pressed.
fig.04-03.e_60
A Track button has performance data when <
> appears under it. Track buttons
for which < > is displayed have no performance data.
9 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g Yo u r Pla y in g w ith Ea se
This records only what you play on the keyboard, without using Automatic
Accompaniment.
fig.04-02
To record a performance
using Automatic
Accompaniment, see
“Recording a Performance
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
A Song/ Disk screen like the one following appears.
fig.04-03.e_60
If there is song data in the
KF-90’s internal memory,
the “Delete song” message
appears. For more
2 . Touch <0:> to display <0:New Song> on the screen.
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, touch Page < >< > to switch screens.
3 . Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
4 . Decide on the tone, tempo, and beat of the performance.
Use the Tone Select buttons and the touch screen to choose the tone.
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
For an explanation of how
to select the tempo and the
5 . Press the Rec [ ] button.
The Play [ ] button indicator will flash, and the KF-90 will be ready for
recording.
To cancel recording, press the Stop [ ] button.
6 . Press the Play [ ] button to start recording.
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
Recording will begin when you start playing the keyboard, even if you do
not press the Play [ ] button. In this case, the count will not be heard.
The Rec [ ] button and Play [ ] button indicators will light.
7 . Press the Stop [ ] button when your recording is completed.
9 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Listening to the Recorded Songs
N O TE
Play back the recorded performance.
Any performance that has
been recorded is deleted
when the power to the KF-
1 . Press the Reset [ ] button.
Now you can play back the song from the beginning.
90 is turned off. If you
don’t want to lose your
recorded performance,
save it on a floppy disk. For
information on how to save
2 . Press the Play [ ] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
3 . To stop playback, press the Stop [ ] button.
If th e fo llo w in g m e ssa g e a p p e a rs
If you’ve recorded a tune, the following message appears on the screen
when you try to choose another song.
fig.04-04.e_80
N O TE
Until a recorded
performance is erased, you
can’t listen to other tunes.
● If y o u d o n ’t w a n t to e ra se th e so n g
Touch <Cancel>.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
● Era sin g a so n g
Touch <OK>.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is
erased.
9 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g a Pe rfo rm a n ce Usin g
Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
You can record the performance with Automatic Accompaniment easily.
A recorded performance is automatically assigned to Track buttons.
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
A Song/ Disk screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.04-03.e_60
If there is song data in the
KF-90’s internal memory,
the “Delete song” message
appears. For more
2 . Touch <0:> to display <0:New Song> on the screen.
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, touch Page < >< > to switch screens.
You can also choose it using the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial.
3 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This makes the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
4 . Use the Music Style buttons and the Touch Screen to choose
a Music Style.
5 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.
6 . Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial to adjust the
tempo of the accompaniment.
7 . Press the Rec [ ] button.
The Play [ ] button indicator will blink, and the KF-90 will be ready for
recording.
You can start recording by
pressing the Play [
button.
]
To stop recording, press the Stop [ ] button.
8 . Specify a chord by playing it in the lower section of the
keyboard to begin recording.
Automatic accompaniment starts, and recording is started at the same time.
You can change how
9 . To stop recording, press the Intro/Ending [1] or [2] button.
An ending is played, then the automatic accompaniment stops, and
recording is stopped at the same time.
recording is stopped when
recording a performance
with Automatic
Press the [Start/ Stop] button to stop the accompaniment and recording
without ending.
Accompaniment. To learn
1 0 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re d o in g a Re co rd in g
Redoing a recording involves specifying a Track button you want to record
over and then recording over again.
If you want to erase a
When you select a Track button and record over a track that has already
been recorded, the newly recorded performance occupies a position
extending from the location where you started recording to where you
stopped recording.
previous performance
before recording over it,
1 . Using the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons, move to the
measure where you wish to start recording.
Press the Reset [
] button at the beginning of the song.
With songs in the KF-90's
internal memory, the Track
buttons are shown when
2 . Press the Rec [ ] button.
The Rec [ ] button’s indicator lights up.
The 5 Track screen appears.
the Rec [
pressed.
] button is
To stop recording, press the Stop [ ] button.
For information on the
Track buttons, take a look
3 . Touch the Track button for the track you want to record over.
<
> will appear above the selected Track button.
The Rec [ ] button and Play [ ] button indicators will flash, and the KF-
90 will be ready for recording.
4 . Begin recording.
The song’s tempo is
If you redo a recording with Automatic Accompaniment, specify a chord in
the left-hand section of the keyboard, or press the [Start/ Stop] button.
If you don’t use automatic accompaniment, press the [Sync/ Reset] button to
extinguish the indicator, and then press the Play [ ] button.
determined when the song
is first recorded. Even
when each track is
recorded over with the
tempo changed, the song is
played back at the tempo
selected when the song was
first recorded. To change
the tempo of a song that
has already been recorded,
The mark <
> changes <
>.
5 . To stop recording, press the Stop [ ] button.
To record the ending over again, press the Intro/ Ending [1] or [2] button.
1 0 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Era sin g a Re co rd e d So n g
You can erase a song that’s been recorded.
Erasing using the buttons
1 . Hold down the [Song/Disk] button and press the Rec [
]
button.
The following screen appears.
fig.04-04_80
2 . Touch <OK> to erase the recorded song.
If you touch <Cancel>, the recorded tune is not erased.
Erasing at the 5 Track Screen
1 . Display the 5 Track Screen.
2 . Touch <Del Song> at the bottom of the screen.
The confirmation screen appears.
3 . Touch <OK> to delete the song.
If you touch <Cancel>, the song is not erased.
● Era sin g th e So u n d Re co rd e d a t Sp e cific Tra ck
Bu tto n s
Here’s how to erase what’s been recorded to a particular Track button:
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
The Song/ Disk screen appears.
2 . Touch <Track> on the screen to display the Track buttons.
A Track button has performance data when <
> appears under it.
Track buttons for which < > is displayed have no performance data.
N O TE
3 . While touching the Track button where the sound you want
to erase on the Touch Screen, press the Rec [ ] button.
The recorded performance is deleted.
You can’t erase the settings
for the recorded song’s
basic tempo or beat.
The displayed Track button changes to <
>.
1 0 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Ch a n g in g Ho w Re co rd in g Sto p s
You can change how recording is stopped when recording a performance
using Automatic Accompaniment.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button, getting its indicator
to light up.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Rec. Mode>.
fig.01-05.e_60
3 . Touch <Rec Stop>
to switch between “Arranger
Stop” and “Composer Stop.”
Indication
Description
When Automatic Accompaniment stops, record-
ing also stops at the same time.
Arranger Stop
Recording doesn’t end when Automatic Accom-
paniment stops. Press the Stop [ ] button to
stop recording.
Composer Stop
Touch <Exit> several times to go back to the previous screen.
1 0 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g So n g s Sta rtin g w ith Pick u p s
You can record songs that start with pickups. Songs that begin on a beat
other than the downbeat are called “songs with pickups.”
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
If there is song data in the
KF-90’s internal memory,
the “Delete song” message
appears. For more
2 . Touch <0: > to display <0: New Song>.
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, touch Page < > and < > to switch
screens.
3 . Touch <Exit> several times.
Display the screen where the measure number appears in the top-right area
of the screen.
4 . Press the Rec [ ] button, turning on that button’s indicator.
The KF-90 enters standby for recording.
5 . Press the Bwd [
] button once.
The measure number at the top-right area of the screen changes to “PU”
(pickup).
fig.01-07.e_60
6 . Press the Play [ ] button to start recording.
fig.04-07.e
~
Measure
-2
PU
1
Recording begins here
7 . Press the Stop [ ] button to stop recording.
1 0 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Co m p o sin g a n Acco m p a n im e n t By
En te rin g Ch o rd s (Ch o rd Se q u e n ce r)
You can enter its chord progression, the places where the accompaniment
pattern changes, and so on to create an accompaniment for the song. This
feature is called “Chord Sequencer.”
With chord sequencer, you can create an accompaniment ahead of time and
play along with this accompaniment using just your right hand. This makes
it easier to enjoy automatic accompaniment.
Creating an accompaniment with Chord Sequencer is carried out at the
Chord Sequencer screen.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button, getting its indicator
to light up.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Chord Sequencer>.
The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord Sequencer screen.”
fig.04-08.e
This is the end of the
song. When continuing
to add input, insert
measures by touching
<Ins>.
This is the “cursor.”
The cursor shows where
the chord change or other
information is input.
This indicates the position
where the accompaniment
pattern (Division) or the
Style Orchestrator changes.
One measure is inserted after the measure indicated by
the cursor.
This deletes the measure indicated by the cursor.
In the Chord Selecter screen, specify the chord. Refer to
Erase all of the data that has been input.
This clears the settings in the place where the cursor is
positioned.
This records the accompaniment you have composed.
Touch here when you have finished creating all your input
1 0 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
3 . Use the Music Style buttons and the touch screen to choose a
Music Style.
Pressing the [To Variation]
button or the [To Original]
button adds a fill-in at the
cursor position and a
4 . Touch <Exit>.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
Variation or Original
5 . Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment pattern.
Division at the measure
after the fill-in. If you want
to enter a Variation or
Original Division without
inserting a fill-in, you need
to assign the function to the
In p u ttin g Ch o rd s w ith th e Ch o rd Se q u e n ce r
fig.04-09.e
Change the accompaniment arrangements
Move the cursor
Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)
To insert fractional chords
such as Fm/ C, assign the
“Leading Bass function” to
a Pad button or a pedal. See
1. Use the Value [+] [-] buttons or the dial to move the cursor to where you
want to make an insertion.
Use the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons to move the cursor a bar at a time.
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the accompaniment
pattern and arrangement.
Just as when performing with Automatic Accompaniment, press the keys to
You can change the accompaniment arrangements with the Style Orchestrator
You can only insert an intro
at the beginning of a song.
When you add an intro, the
number of bars
3. Touching <Ins> once inserts a measure after the bar where the cursor is
located. Conversely, touching <Del> deletes the measure containing the
cursor and moves the cursor to the next bar.
corresponding to the length
of the intro is inserted
automatically.
Ch e ck th e Acco m p a n im e n t Yo u In p u tte d
Let’s listen to the completed accompaniment while inputting data.
If you assign the function
to a pedal, you can insert a
break in the middle of a
1. Press the Play [ ] button to play back the accompaniment.
2. Press the Stop [ ] button to stop playback.
6 . When you have finished inputting all the data, touch
<Execute>.
The accompaniment you’ve composed is registered at “0:New Song.”
Press the Play [ ] button and try fingering the melody while the
accompaniment you’ve composed is played back.
The song you’ve created
disappears when you turn
off the power. If you don’t
want to lose it, you should
save it on a floppy disk.
1 0 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Inputting Chords Without Playing the Keyboard
You can use <Chord> at the bottom of the Chord Sequencer screen to
specify chords on the screen.
1 . At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chord>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.04-10.e_60
2 . Touch the
to specify a chord.
Touch <Exit> to return the Chord Sequencer Screen.
3 . Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
1 0 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Cre a tin g a Rh y th m Pa rt w ith Ea se
The KF-90 has a large number of onboard rhythm patterns. You can use
these onboard rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part with ease.
The rhythm pattern is
recorded to the <R/
Rhythm> Track button.
When using the 16-track
record only to Part D (10).
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button, getting its indicator
to light up.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Rhythm Pattern>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.04-11.e_60
For more information
about onboard rhythm
patterns, please refer to
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
3 . Use the touch screen to choose a rhythm pattern.
You can use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial.
Rhythm patterns are shown in the format “name (number of bars).”
You can also paste a
rhythm pattern into a song
without recording
4 . Touch <Audition> on screen to hear the rhythm pattern.
Make sure the rhythm pattern you hear is the one you chose.
anything. Take a look at
To stop the rhythm pattern, touch <Stop> on the screen.
5 . Touch <Record> on the screen to start recording.
The rhythm pattern begins to play, and at the same time, recording starts.
Record rhythm patterns only for the necessary number of measures.
6 . Touch <Stop> on the screen to stop recording.
The rhythm pattern stops, and recording ends.
1 0 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Sa vin g So n g s to Flo p p y Disk s
The performance data recorded in the KF-90’s internal memory will be lost
when you switch to another song or when the power is turned off.
Be sure to save unfinished performance data as well as other important
performance data to a floppy disk.
N O TE
If you’re using the disk
drive for the first time, be
sure to read the important
● Fo rm a ttin g Flo p p y Disk s (Fo rm a t)
New floppy disks or disks that have been used on another device cannot be
used with the KF-90 just as they are. The operation that readies floppy disks
for use with the KF-90 is called “Format.”
Ca u tio n !
Formatting a disk destroys all data previously stored on the disk. If you’re
formatting a used floppy disk for reuse, be sure to check first to make sure
the disk doesn’t contain any data you don’t want to lose.
fig.04-12
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
A Song/ Disk screen like the one following appears.
fig.04-03.e_60
1 0 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
2 . Touch <Disk> on the screen.
A Song Disk Menu screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.04-13.e_60
3 . Make sure the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is
positioned at “WRITE” (write enabled).
fig.04-15.e
N O TE
Rear side of the disk
Never eject a disk while
reading or writing is in
progress, since that can
damage the magnetic
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable. (The
disk drive's indicator will
light up at full brightness
when the drive is busy
reading or writing data.
Ordinarily, the indicator
will be less brightly lighted,
or be extinguished.)
Write Protect Tab
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
4 . With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the disk drive until it clicks into position.
5 . Touch <Format Disk>.
The following screen appears.
fig.04-14.e_60
N O TE
Don’t try to take the floppy
disk out of the disk drive
until the formatting process
is finished.
Touch <Cancel> to go back to the Song Disk Menu screen.
6 . Touch <OK> to start formatting.
If “Error” appears on
When the format is finished, the Song Disk Menu screen returns.
Touch <Exit> several times to go back to the previous screen.
1 1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Sa vin g Yo u r So n g s o n Flo p p y Disk
A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power, or
choose another song. The process of storing data such as recorded
performances on floppy disk is called “saving.” It’s a good idea to store
important songs on floppy disk.
N O TE
Depending on the playback
instrument, some notes
may drop out or sound
different.
Before using a new floppy disk or a floppy disk used on another device, it
N O TE
Some commercially
available music files cannot
be saved because they are
copyrighted.
1 . Make sure the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is
positioned at “WRITE” (write enabled).
2 . With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the disk drive until it clicks into position.
3 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
A Song/ Disk screen appears.
4 . Touch <Disk> on the screen.
A Song Disk Menu screen appears.
If not handled with care, a
floppy disk can get
5 . Touch <Save>.
The following screen will appear.
cracked, or the data on it
can get corrupted, making
playback impossible. We
recommend saving your
songs on two different
floppy disks. By putting
away for safekeeping an
additional copy of a floppy
disk on which your songs
are saved, you can feel
safer.
fig.04-16.e_60
N O TE
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Song Disk Menu screen.
Inserting a floppy disk
containing one or more
saved songs into another
device (such as a computer)
with the floppy disk’s
protect tab left in the
6 . Touch
to scroll the cursor sideways, and enter the
name of the song by using the Value [-] [+] buttons or the
dial to choose the letters.
Assign a name to the song to be saved.
Touch <A-a-0-!> at the bottom of the screen to change the type of script.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through “English
(upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to
“English (upper case).”
“write” position may,
depending on the device,
render the songs on that
floppy disk permanently
unplayable (refer to the
Touching <_> inserts a blank space at the cursor location.
1 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
7 . After you’ve entered the name of the song, touch
to
choose a song number.
When you select a song number that is already being used for another song,
the name of the song appears in the save destination column. If you then
proceed to save the new material to that song, the song previously saved in
that destination is erased, and the new song is saved in its place. If you don’t
want to erase a previously saved song, choose a number where no song
name appears in the destination column.
8 . Touch Compatibility <KF> or <GS>.
The KF-90 feature specially created tones, exclusive to the KF-90, which
provide richer, more realistic musical expression on these instruments.
However, song data recorded using these tones may not be reproduced
correctly when played back on other instruments. If you want to save your
with Compatibility “GS” enabled.
If the Compatibility
function is “GS” when you
save the data, the
performance may differ
slightly from the original
recording when played
back on the KF-90.
Indication
Description
Saves the data using sounds exclusive to the KF-90, for
rich, expressive performances.
KF
N O TE
Saves the data in a form that allows you to enjoy play-
back on other GS devices.
GS
You can only save songs in
one format on a single
floppy disk. And a song
recorded using commercial
music files can’t be saved in
“Save As SMF” format for
reasons of copyright
9 . Touch <Save> or <As SMF> to start saving.
There is a difference described below between <Save> and <As SMF> in
format for saving.
Indication
Description
protection.
Saves the song in KF-90 format. You can listen to songs
saved in this format on the Roland HP-G series and KR
series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices.
This format is called “i-format”.
N O TE
Save
Don’t take the floppy disk
out of the disk drive until
the saving process is
finished.
Saves the song as a SMF (Standard MIDI File). Songs
saved in this SMF format can be listened to on many
As SMF
Saving may take from several second, to several dozen seconds.
When the saving process is finished, the Song Disk Menu screen appears.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
It’s a good idea to get into
the habit of moving the
write-protect tab on the
floppy disk to the “Protect”
position when you’ve
finished saving your data.
Keeping the tab at
“Protect” prevents
operations that could erase
your songs by mistake.
1 1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
De le tin g So n g s fro m Flo p p y Disk s
You can delete songs that have been saved to floppy disks.
1 . Make sure the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is
positioned at “WRITE” (write enabled).
2 . With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the disk drive until it clicks into position.
3 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
A Song/ Disk screen appears.
4 . Touch <Disk> on the screen.
A Song Disk Menu screen appears.
5 . Choose <Delete>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.04-17.e_60
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Song Disk Menu screen.
6 . Touch the
to specify a song you want to delete.
7 . Touch <Delete> to display a message like the one shown
below.
fig.04-18.e_80
8 . Touch <OK>.
The song selected is deleted.
Touching <Cancel> cancels deleting the song.
1 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Ch a n g in g th e O rd e r o f So n g s o n Flo p p y
Disk
Here’s how you can change the order of songs saved on a floppy disk.
For more about formatting,
1 . Have ready an empty, formatted floppy disk.
2 . Insert the floppy disk containing the saved songs into the
disk drive.
3 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
4 . Use the touch screen or Page < > and < > to select the
song to which you would like to assign song number one.
5 . After you’ve chosen a song, touch <Exit> several times.
Display the screen where the measure number appears in the top-right area
of the screen.
N O TE
6 . Press the Play [ ] button.
The measure number of the
screen appears in reverse
video while the KF-90
The measure number on the screen appears in reverse video.
reads the song data from
floppy disk. Don’t take the
floppy disk out of the drive
until the display returns to
its original state.
7 . When the measure number display returns to its original
appearance, press the Stop [ ] button.
8 . Take the floppy disk out of the disk drive.
9 . Insert a blank floppy disk.
N O TE
Some commercially
available music files cannot
be saved because they are
copyrighted.
Repeat these steps to save the song you want to have song number 2, the
song you want to have song number 3, and so on to the blank floppy disk in
the desired song sequence.
1 1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
In addition to the functions introduced in “Chapter 4
Ho w to Ch o o se th e Re co rd in g Me th o d
Recording and Saving Performances,” the KF-90 features a
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
variety of other recording functions.
A Composer Navigator screen appears.
fig.05-01.e_50
Se le ctin g th e Re co rd in g
Me th o d
You can use any of the four methods below to record with
the KF-90.
Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
whereby previously recorded material is erased when new
sounds are recorded, you’ll find that you can record songs
easily by using this method in combination with other
recording methods.
2 . Touch <Rec Mode>.
•
A Recording Mode screen like the one shown below
This is the normal method for recording. New material is
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.
appears.
fig.05-02.e_50
•
New notes are recorded as a layer on top of notes recorded
earlier.
•
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, with new notes
being combined with existing ones.
This is handy when you’re making rhythm parts, such as by
layering different percussion tones while recording the same
passage over and over.
•
3 . Touch <Rec Mode>
recording type.
to choose the
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
Display
Recording Method
* Immediately after the power is turned on, the Replace
Recording is selected.
Replace
Replace Recording
Mix Recording
Mix
Loop
Loop Recording
Auto Punch In/OUt
Punch In Recording at the
passage between the markers.
Manual Punch In/Out
Tempo
Punch In Recording starts at the
place where you depress the
pedal.
You can add tempo changes to a
recorded composition.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
1 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
● Re co rd in g W h ile Era sin g th e
W h a t is Bla n k Re co rd in g ?
Blank Recording is the recording of blank measures, that
Pre vio u s Re co rd in g
(Re p la ce Re co rd in g )
Recording whereby you erase previously recorded material
as you record something new is called “Replace Recording.”
This setting is in effect when you turn on the power.
is, measures with no performance recorded to them.
1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.
2. Press the Rec [
button.
] button, then press the Play [
]
<Replace>.
The indicators for the Rec [
] and Play [
]
buttons light up, and recording starts.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
The KF-90 enters the Replace Recording mode.
performance.
3. Without actually playing anything, record the
necessary number of measures, then press the Stop
] button.
[
The indicators for the Rec [
] and Play [
]
buttons go dark, and recording stops.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
The recording method changes to loop recording.
● O ve rd u b b in g W ith o u t Era sin g
th e Pre vio u s Re co rd in g
(Mix Re co rd in g )
You can record a performance layered over an previously
recorded performance. This method is called “Mix
Recording.”
3 . Press the [Song/Disk] button and touch <Track>
to display the Track buttons.
4 . Press the Rec [ ] button.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
The recording method changes to mixing recording.
Record the performance, following the procedures
5 . Touch the Track button for the track you want to
record.
The KF-90 enters standby for recording.
6 . Press the Play [ ] button to start recording.
Recording start from the measure which Marker A is
placed.
* After you have finished with mix recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode.
When the song advances to Marker B, it then returns to
Marker A, where recording continues.
Each time the recording is looped, the sounds being
played are layered over the sounds recorded on previous
passes.
● Re p e a te d ly Re co rd in g O ve r th e
Sa m e Lo ca tio n
(Lo o p Re co rd in g )
You can record a specified passage over and over again as
many times as you like, layering the sound with each pass.
This method is called “Loop Recording.” This is handy when
recording a Rhythm Part.
7 . Press the Stop [ ] button to stop recording.
Lo o p Re co rd in g Sh o rtcu t
You can also use the method described below to make
For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a
four-measure segment.
the setting for Loop Recording.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the
passage you want to record.
First record the bass drum, the snare drum next, then the hi-
hat after that, and so on, repeatedly layering a different
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have
finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can
to create as many copies of the four measures as you need,
making completion of the Rhythm Part very simple.
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
1 . Place A and B markers at the beginning and end
of the passage you want to record.
This sets the loop recording mode.
Start a recording.
* When you’re finished with Loop Recording, return to the
ordinary Replace Recording mode at the “Recording Mode”
screen.
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
1 1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
3 . Start recording.
● Re -Re co rd in g Pa rt o f Yo u r
Pe rfo rm a n ce
(Pu n ch -in Re co rd in g )
Up until the specified interval, the performance as
already recorded is played back.
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
When you reach the specified interval, sounds are erased
as recording starts; begin playing now.
When the end of the specified interval is passed,
recording stops, and the KF-90 returns to playback of the
performance already recorded.
This recording method is called “Punch-in Recording.”
This function lets you record over only at a specified point in
a part, as you listen to a prerecorded performance in another
section. This is a very convenient feature to have in situations
such as when you want to record over only one part of the
melody.
4 . Press the Stop [ ] button to stop playback.
Punch-In Recording offers the following two methods.
•
Recording the passage specified by markers A and B
(Auto Punch In/Out)
Sta rtin g Re co rd in g fro m th e Me a su re
Sp e cifie d b y Pe d a ls
When you’re using pedals, change the action of the pedal
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to define
the passage you want to record over. Make the setting for
punch-in recording, and carry out recording. You can re-
record just the passage between markers A and B.
ahead of time.
and assign <Punch In/ Out> to the pedal.
•
Beginning recording at the point where the pedal is
pressed (Manual Punch In/Out)
Punch In/Out>.
You can play back a recorded performance and depress the
pedal at the desired place to start recording. Depressing the
pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to
playback.
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
2 . Begin recording.
Re co rd in g a Pa ssa g e sp e cifie d b y
m a rk e rs
The performance that you recorded will be played back.
Depress the pedal, and recording will start.
Depressing the pedal again stops recording, and the KF-
90 returns to playback of the performance already
recorded.
1 . Before you start recording, place markers A and B
to define the passage you want to record over.
specify the interval.
3 . Press the Stop [ ] button, and playback of the
2 . At the Rec Mode screen, choose <Auto Punch In/
song is stopped.
Out>.
fig.05-02.e_50
* When you’re finished with Punch In Recording, return to the
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
1 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
Since the 16 Track Sequencer records one tone to one part,
such functions to record two or more tones to one Part
simultaneously. Also, you can’t record the performance with
Automatic Accompaniment.
Mu ltitra ck Re co rd in g w ith 1 6
Pa rts (1 6 -Tra ck Se q u e n ce r)
Multitrack recording is a method of recording whereby you
listen to previously recorded material while continuing to
add performances of other parts.
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,
then you should use the Track Buttons for recording. (Refer
The KF-90 is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen
parts. Since each part’s performance is recorded using one
tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones
for the data in one song.
Co m m e rcia lly Ava ila b le Mu sic File s
Commercially available song data recorded in Roland’s SMF
The function used to layer these sixteen parts one at a time is
format is also composed of sixteen parts.
called the “16 Track Sequencer.”
fig.05-03.e
By loading the song data from the floppy disk and using the
16 Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song data.
1 6 Tra ck Se q u e n ce r
You can record performances for up to 16 parts,
overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.
* Although Part 11 on commercial Roland SMF music data is
included in the [Accomp] Track Button, the correspondence
between all other parts and the Track Buttons remains
unchanged.
Part 1
Flute Part
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Bass Part
* With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
the data.
Piano Part (right hand)
Piano Part (left hand)
•
•
•
•
•
Part 16
1 6 Tra ck Se q u e n ce r a n d Tra ck Bu tto n s
In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
Buttons” are another of the KF-90’s recording functions.
These “Track buttons” comprise five buttons used for
organizing 16 Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows
you to use the 16 Track Sequencer to add even more sounds
to performances recorded with the Track buttons, and make
even more detailed edits of the songs.
Additionally, you can easily play back the original song data
with the 16 Track Sequencer, mute parts just by touching the
Track Buttons, and more.
The track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as
shown below.
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
[1/Whole]
[2/Accomp]
[3/Left]
Part
D(10), S(11)
1
2, 5 to 9, 12 to 16
3
4
[4/Right]
1 1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
● Th e 1 6 -tra ck Se q u e n ce r Scre e n
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
track Sequencer screen.
● Re co rd in g w ith th e 1 6 Tra ck
Se q u e n ce r
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
Ste p 1 Ge t re a d y to re co rd
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
2 . Touch <16Tr. Sequencer>.
The following screen will appear. This is called the “16-
2 . Select the song number to which you want to
track Sequencer screen.”
fig.05-04.e_50
record.
To record a new song, select <0: >.
Touch <0: > to change the display to <0:New Song>.
If <0:New Song> doesn’t appear on screen, touch Page
<
> and < > to switch screens.
If you have recorded a song or changed a song’s settings,
the message “Delete Song OK?” appears on the screen
when you touch <0:New Song>. For more information,
3 . Press the [Metronome] button and choose the
Icon
Description
If you do not use the metronome, press the [Metronome]
button, turning off the button’s indicator.
<1>-<16>
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or
the part whose settings are to be changed.
The Part you choose is highlighted.
* You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
The selected part
This Part to be played back
4 . Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the
basic tempo of the song.
The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)
* This procedure cannot be used to change the tempo when
prerecorded song data is used. To change the basic tempo of a
Parts that do not have performance data
recorded to them.
<Solo>
<Mute>
Only the selected Part is played back.
Ste p 2 Sta rt re co rd in g
If necessary, choose a recording method.
This allows you to prevent the sound for the
selected part from playing.
<Clear>
This clears the performance data in the
selected part.
1 . Display the 16-track Sequencer screen.
Follow the procedure described in “16 Track Sequencer
Screen” above.
<Tone Set>
<Options>
This displays the Tone Set screen. For
2 . Touch the number for the Part you want to record.
This displays the Part Settings screen, in
which you can make detailed settings for
each part. For more detailed information,
The Part you touch appears in reverse video.
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on
Part D(10) or Part S(11).
1 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
3 . Use the Tone Select buttons to choose a Tone to
● Ge ttin g th e Mo st Su ita b le Pa rt
To n e s fo r th e Mu sica l Ge n re
(To n e Se t)
play.
To record a drum sound or effect sound, press the
“Tone Set” is a function that assigns to each of the sixteen
parts the most suitable tones for the selected musical genre.
Whenever you find yourself knowing the kind of song you
want to create, but not the tones to use, let Tone Set assign
the tones, then alter the tones as necessary to fit the image
you have in mind.
After you’ve chosen a Tone, touch <Exit> to display the
16-track Sequencer screen.
4 . Press the Reset [
] button.
This makes it so that recording starts at the beginning of
the song.
When you want to start recording from a point in the
1 . Display the 16-track Sequencer screen.
song other than the beginning, use the Bwd [
] or
Press the [Composer Navigator] button and touch
<16Track Sequence> to display the screen.
Fwd [
start.
] button to select the measure from which to
2 . Touch <Tone Set> at the bottom of the screen.
5 . Press the Rec [ ] button, getting its indicator to
light up.
The following screen will appear.
fig.05-05.e_50
The KF-90 enters standby for recording.
6 . Press the Play [ ] button.
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
Start a recording.
7 . Press the Stop [ ] button.
Recording stops.
When the recording of one part is finished, select another
part and continue by recording that part.
Record the parts you need, layering each additional part,
to complete the song.
3 . Touch the screen to select a musical genre.
* You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1 Get
ready to record” when you’re recording the first Part. For the
second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed from
“Step 2 Start recording.”
4 . Touch <Exit>.
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s o f
Ea ch Pa rt
* The song you’ve recorded disappears when you switch off the
power. Save the song on a floppy disk. For more information,
When you’ve recorded a song with the 16-track sequencer,
you can change the volume level, Tone, or set to mute out the
sound for a single Part.
* Because commercially available Roland SMF Music Data is
also made up of 16 Parts for sounding the notes of individual
instruments, you can change the settings for the individual
Parts and play them back in the same way.
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button, and touch the
screen to choose the song.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
2 . Display the 16-track Sequencer screen.
Press the [Composer Navigator] button and touch
<16Track Sequence> to display the screen.
A 16-track Sequencer screen like the one shown below
appears.
1 2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
fig.05-04.e_50
6 . Touch
for the corresponding item to
change the setting.
Display
Volume
Reverb
Chorus
Panpot
Description
Changes the volume level.
Changes the depth of the reverb effect.
Changes the amount of chorus applied.
Shifts the direction the sound is heard from to
the left or right. Touch
to the right, or touch
to shift the sound
to shift it to the left.
3 . Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you
want to make settings.
W h a t’s Pa n p o t?
Panpot is the control that determines the placement of the
sound in the stereo sound field between left and right
speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can change the
perceived location of the sound between the left and right
speakers.
4 . Change the settings for the selected Part.
Display
Solo
Function
Only the selected Part is played back.
Toggles playback of the selected Part on or off.
Mute
Clear
Erases the performance information for the
Part.
7 . Press the Play [ ] button to play back the song
with the changed settings.
Touching <Clear> displays the Message for
confirm. To erase the recorded sound, touch
<Yes>. If you don’t want to erase the recorded
sound, touch <Cancel>. Once a performance
has been erased, it can’t be restored.
Monitor the effect by actually listening to the song.
Press the Stop [ ] button to stop playback of the song.
8 . If necessary, change the settings for other Parts as
well.
Touch Part < > and < > to change the Parts.
5 . You can make detailed settings for the selected
The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.
Part by touching <Options>.
9 . While pressing the Rec [ ] button, also press the
The following screen will appear.
fig.05-06.e_50
Reset [
] button.
This operation set the changes in the settings.
The song can then be saved to a floppy disk.
If you don’t want to lose the song whose settings for
individual Parts you’ve changed, you should save it on a
* The setting that determines whether an individual Part is
played or not can’t be saved to floppy disk.
If th e fo llo w in g m e ssa g e a p p e a rs
If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone Select button to change the Tone while
this screen is displayed. The Part name and the tone
name is displayed at the top of the screen.
song’s settings for each Part, a message like the one below
may appear.
fig.05-07.e_70
Touch <Yes> to change the song’s settings.
Touch <No> to discard the changes in settings.
1 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
Co m p o sin g a So n g Th a t Ch a n g e s
th e Be a t Pa rtw a y Th ro u g h
Ch a n g in g a So n g ’s Ba sic
Te m p o
You can create songs that have beat changes during the
course of the song.
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic
tempo is that was initially set when the song was recorded.
* You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
1 . Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a
tempo.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Hold down the Rec [ ] button and press the
Reset [
] button.
2 . Touch <Beat Map>.
The following screen will appear.
The song’s basic tempo changes.
fig.05-09.e_50
The changed setting is discarded when you turn off the
power or choose a different song.
It is a good idea to save important song data to floppy
* For songs that have tempo changes within the song, first press
the Reset [
] button to return to the beginning of the song
before carrying out this procedure. Changing the tempo
without returning to the start of the song causes the
proportion by which the tempo is altered at the location of the
tempo change to affect the overall tempo of the composition.
3 . Use the Bwd [
> <
] and Fwd [
] buttons or
<
> on the screen to move to the bar
where you want to change the beat.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
screen.
Touching <
Touching <
> goes back to the beginning of the song.
> moves to the end of the song.
4 . Touch
<Execute>.
to choose the beat, and touch
The beat change starting with the measure where you
moved to.
5 . Touch <Exit> twice.
The screen displayed before you pressed the [Composer
Navigator] button appears.
6 . Press the Reset [
] button to return the measure
number to “1.”
7 . Start a recording.
Record the performance, following the procedures
1 2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Fu n ctio n
8 . Press the Stop [ ] button to stop recording.
Ch a n g in g th e Te m p o W ith in
th e So n g
The song’s tempo changes.
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
The KF-90 stores song tempo information and performance
data separately. Therefore, when making changes to the
tempo in a song, you must record the changes in the tempo
information independently of the performance data.
This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”
● Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o a t a
Pa rticu la r Me a su re
You can have the tempo change at the beginning of a
measure where you moved to. This is handy when you want
to make a sudden change in tempo.
● Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o W h ile
Liste n in g to a So n g
You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo
changes.
1 . Make the setting for Tempo Recording at the
Recording Mode screen.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The steps are the same as the steps 1 to 3 in “Adjusting
the Tempo While Listening to a Song”.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Rec Mode>.
2 . Using the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons,
A Recording Mode screen like the one shown below
move to the measure where you wish to change
the tempo.
appears.
fig.05-02.e_50
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
3 . When you press the Rec [ ] button, the button’s
indicator flashes.
The KF-90 enters standby for recording.
4 . Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial to
adjust the tempo.
5 . Press the Rec [ ] button.
The song’s tempo changes starting with the measure
where you moved to.
3 . Touch <Rec Mode>
, and choose
<Tempo>.
6 . Press the Stop [ ] button to end recording.
This makes the setting for tempo recording.
Touch <Exit> several times to go back to the screen that
shows the measure number in the top-right area of the
screen.
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
4 . Press the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons to
* If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,
move to a place a little earlier than the bar where
you want to change the tempo.
5 . Press the Rec [ ] button and confirm that its
indicator blinking.
The KF-90 enters standby for recording.
Te m p o Re co rd in g Sh o rtcu t
You can also enter the Tempo Recording mode by
6 . Press the Play [ ] button to start recording.
holding down the Tempo [-] or [+] button and pressing
7 . When you get to the place where you want to
change the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+]
buttons or the dial to vary the tempo as desired.
the Rec [
] button.
Record tempo information.
In this case, tempo recording is canceled when recording
ends.
1 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
Part Exchange Exchanges (swaps) the notes in two Parts
Ch o o sin g a n Ed itin g Fu n ctio n
Note Edit
PC Edit
Used to correct individual notes one at a
There is a variety of ways you can edit performances recorded
using the KF-90 Track buttons or 16-track sequencer.
Used to correct changes in Tones during the
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button, getting
its indicator to light up.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
fig.06-01b.eps
● “PC” is an abbreviation for Program Change, which is a
command that means “Change the Tone.” In a song that
changes Tones partway through, a “PC” is inserted at the
place where the Tone changes.
Ca n ce lin g a n Ed it
You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and
restore it to the way it was before.
2 . Touch <Song Edit>.
1 . Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
A Song Edit screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.06-02.eps
Function” to choose <Undo>.
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.
fig.06-03.eps
Touch Page < > and < > to switch screens and
display other editing functions.
2 . Touch <OK> to cancel the editing function shown
on screen.
3 . Touch Page < > and < > to switch screens and
choose an editing function.
Touch <Cancel> to go back to the Edit screen.
After you make your choice, follow the steps on the page
for the selected function to carry out the operation.
● Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We
recommend saving your song on a floppy disk or User
Memory before you edit it. For information on how to save
Display
Undo
Description
Copy
Copies a measure or onboard rhythm
Quantize
Corrects discrepancies in the timing of notes
Delete
Insert
Transpose
Erase
1 2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
“Mix”
Co p y in g a Me a su re
When a recorded performance exists at the copy
destination, the newly copied passage is mixed
with the previous recording. When the Tones of
the copy source and destination are different, the
Tone of the destination is used.
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy
when you’re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
fig.06-07
Ex. To copy measure 5-7 to measure 8.
“Insert”
When a recorded performance exists at the copy
destination, the newly copied passage is inserted
without deleting the previous recording. This
makes the song longer by an amount equal to the
number of inserted measures.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
To
The measure number of the copy destination
Choosing “End” copies to the end of the song.
The following screen will appear.
Times
The number of times to copy
fig.06-08.eps
2 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
make the setting for.
3 . Use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to set the
item.
To cancel copying, touch <Exit>.
The copy is canceled, then you are returned to the Song
Edit screen.
4 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
Display Description
<Execute>.
From
For
The first measure in the passage you want to copy
The number of measures to copy
Copying starts.
When copying is done, you are returned to the Song Edit
screen.
Src
Track button or Part number of the copy source
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. When you do this,
<Dst> changes to “- - -.”
Choosing “R.Pattern” copies the KF-90’s built-in
Rhythm Patterns. For more information, take a
If you choose a Track button, you can only copy to
the selected Track button.
Dst
Track button or Part number of the copy
destination
Mode
Copy type
There are three types of copying, which are
described below.
“Replace”
When a recorded performance exists at the copy
destination, the previous recording is deleted and
replaced with the copied passage.
1 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
Co p y in g a Rh y th m Pa tte rn
Co rre ctin g Tim in g
Discre p a n cie s
The KF-90 has a large number of onboard rhythm patterns.
You can copy these rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part.
For more information about the kind of Rhythm Patterns,
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded
performance by having the music be aligned with a timing
you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter-
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus
For more about ordinary copying, please refer to
making the timing accurate.
fig.06-04.e
Example: Quarter-note resolution
2 . Touch <Src>, and use the dial to choose “R.Pattern.”
Actual note data
This makes the setting for copying a built-in Rhythm
1
2
3
4
Pattern.
fig.06-09.eps
Note data after quantization
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution
Actual note data
1
2
3
4
Note data after quantization
•
<From> changes <Ptn>, and the column displays the
Rhythm Pattern’s name and number of bars.
<Dst> is fixed at “Part 10 (D),” and can’t be changed.
Switching <Src> to something other than “R.Pattern”
makes the setting for ordinary copying.
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-05.eps
•
•
3 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
make the setting for.
4 . Use the Value [-] and [+] buttons or the dial to set
the item.
Press the Play [
] button to hear the rhythm pattern.
Press the Stop [ ] button to stop playing the rhythm
pattern.
Display
Description
From
The first measure in the passage you want to
quantize
Touching <Exit> returns you to the “Song Edit screen,”
without the copy being executed.
For
The number of measures you want to quantize
Tr/Pt
Track button or Part number to quantize
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage in
all Parts.
5 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
Copying starts.
Resolution Timing of quantizing
Select one of the following values.
When copying is done, you are returned to the Song Edit
screen.
1/ 2 (half note), 1/ 4 (quarter note),
1/ 6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/ 8 (eighth note),
1/ 12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/ 16 (sixteenth note),
1/ 24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
● You can also record the rhythm pattern. Take a look at
1/ 32 (thirty-second note)
1 2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
2 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
De le tin g a Sp e cific Me a su re
make the setting for.
You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.
When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the
performance is shifted up to fill the gap. This erasure of
3 . Use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to make
the setting for the item.
If you want to cancel quantizing, touch <Exit>.
The Quantize operation will be canceled, and the Song
Edit screen will reappear.
portions of a performance is called “Deleting.”
fig.06-10
Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5-8
4 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
<Execute>.
Quantizing starts.
When the quantization is finished, you are returned to
the Song Edit screen.
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-11.eps
Display
Description
From
The first measure in the passage you want to
delete
For
The number of measures to delete
Tr/Pt
Track button or Part number to delete
Choosing “All” deletes the same location in all
Parts.
2 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
make the setting for.
3 . Use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to set the
item.
To cancel deletion of the measure, touch <Exit>.
The deletion is canceled and the KF-90 goes back to the
Song Edit screen.
4 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
The deletion process starts.
When the deletion is finished, you are returned to the
Song Edit screen.
1 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
In se rtin g a Bla n k Me a su re
Tra n sp o sin g In d ivid u a l Pa rts
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
addition of a blank measure is called “Insertion.”
fig.06-12
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-16.eps
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-13.eps
Display
Description
From
The first measure in the passage you want to
transpose
For
The number of measures to transpose
Tr/Pt
Track button or Part number to transpose
Choosing “All” transposes the same location in
all Parts.
Bias
The amount of transposition
You can choose a value from -24 (two octaves
lower) to +24 (two octaves higher), in semitone
increments.
Display
Description
From
The first measure in the passage you want to
insert
For
The number of measures to insert
2 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
Tr/Pt
Track button or Part number to insert
Choosing “All” inserts the blank measures at the
same location in all Parts.
make the setting for.
3 . Use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to set the
item.
2 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
To cancel transposition, touch <Exit>.
The transposition is canceled and the KF-90 goes back to
the Song Edit screen.
make the setting for.
3 . Use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to set the
4 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
item.
<Execute>.
To cancel insertion of a blank measure, touch <Exit>.
The insertion is canceled and the KF-90 goes back to the
Song Edit screen.
The passage you specified is transposed at the specified
value.
When transposition is finished, you are returned to the
Song Edit screen.
4 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
Insertion of a blank measure starts.
When insertion is finished, you are returned to the Song
Edit screen.
1 2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
“Prog.Change”
Ma k in g a Me a su re Bla n k
Erases tone change information.
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of
measures, making these blank measures, without reducing
the length of the song. This process of making certain
“Note”
Erases only notes.
“Except Note”
measures blank is called “Erasing.”
Erases performance information for everything
but notes.
fig.06-14
Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8
“Expression”
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Erases Expression (volume change)
information.
2 . Touch the screen to choose the item you want to
make the setting for.
blank measures
3 . Use the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to set the
item.
To cancel the erase operation, touch <Exit>.
The erase operation is canceled and the KF-90 goes back
to the Song Edit screen.
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-15.eps
4 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
The specified passage is blanked out.
When erasing is finished, you are returned to the Song
Edit screen.
Display
Description
From
The first measure in the passage you want to
blank out
For
The number of measures to blank out
Tr/Pt
Track button or Part number to blank out
Choosing “All” blanks out the same location in
all Parts.
Event
Performance information to erase
Select from the following settings.
“All”
Erases all performance information, such as
the notes, tempo, tone changes, and volume-
level changes.
“Tempo”
Erases tempo information. By erasing the
tempo information for all bars, the song will
change with a uniform tempo. In this case,
please choose “All” for <Tr/ Pt>.
1 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
Ex ch a n g in g Pa rts
Co rre ctin g N o te s O n e b y O n e
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part
with the notes recorded for another part.
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual
notes is called “Note Editing.”
This process of swapping parts is called “Part Exchange.”
● You can make the corrections described below by using
Note Editing.
•
•
•
Deleting misplayed notes
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-17.eps
Changing the scale of a single note
Changing the key velocity of a single note
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-18.eps
Location
Pitch
Velocity
2 . Touch each
to choose Parts you want to
exchange.
If you want to cancel the Part exchange, touch <Exit>.
The part-exchanging is canceled, then you are returned
to the Song Edit screen.
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as
the format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a
beat.
3 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
When the part-exchanging process is finished, you are
returned to the Song Edit screen.
2 . Touch Part < > and < > to choose the Part that
contains the note you want to change.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
3 . Press the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons or
touch
on the screen to find the note you
want to correct.
Once you touch <Event>, then you can also search the
note by the dial.
4 . When you’ve found the note you want to correct,
touch <Pitch> or <Velocity> for the note.
5 . Use the dial or the Value [-] [+] buttons to correct
the pitch or velocity. If you want to delete the
note, touch <Delete>.
6 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Exit>.
You are returned to the Song Edit screen.
1 3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s
Mo d ify in g th e To n e Ch a n g e s
in a So n g
In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the
course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of
a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is
inserted at the place where you want the sound to change.
This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and
actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the
Tone that is selected by them are called “PC Editing.”
The following screen will appear.
fig.06-19.eps
Location
Tone name
The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as
the format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a
beat.
2 . Touch Part < > and < > to choose the Part that
contains the note you want to change.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
3 . Press the Bwd [
] and Fwd [
] buttons or
touch
on the screen to find the note you
want to correct.
Once you touch <Event>, then you can also search the
note by the dial.
4 . When you’ve found the Program Change you
want to modify, touch <Tone Name> on the
screen.
5 . Use the Tone Select buttons to choose the Tone
group, and use the dial to choose one of the tones.
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch
<Delete>.
6 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Exit>.
You are returned to the Song Edit screen.
1 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
● Co m b in in g Sty le s to Cre a te a
Cre a tin g a n O rig in a l Sty le
(Use r Sty le )
N e w Sty le (Sty le Co m p o se r)
You can create a new User Style by selecting the Rhythm,
Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and
Accompaniment 3 parts from different styles. This function is
called the “Style Composer”.
The KF-90 has built-in Music Styles in a variety of genres, but
you can also create your own original styles.
An original style is called a “User Style.”
You can use either of the two methods described below to
create a User Style with the KF-90.
* You can only combine the KF-90’s built-in styles.
1 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
The Style Navigator screen appears.
fig.07-02.eps
Sty le Co m p o se r
This method combines the KF-90’s onboard styles to create a
new style.
You can create a new style just by selecting from among the
Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and
Accompaniment 3 parts from different styles.
This method extracts the portions you need from songs
composed with the 16-track sequencer to create a new style.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and
working on that, the KF-90 automatically extrapolates the
other chords, and arranges the style.
2 . Touch <Create Style>.
fig.07-02-2.eps
The Style Converter has an “Auto Mode” for creating Music
Styles simply from a song with a single chord, and a
“Manual Mode” for creating a Music Style from a song of
three chords (major, minor, and diminished seventh).
3 . Touch <Style Composer>.
* If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
fig.07-03.eps
•
•
Touch <Cancel> to display the Style Navigator screen.
Please save the User Style on a floppy disk or in the
Touch <OK> to erase the previous User Style.
1 3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
A Style Composer Screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.07-04.eps
Mu tin g Pa rts fo r a Pa rticu la r Divisio n
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific
Divisions.
For instance, you can sound all parts when in Variation (the
Variation accompaniment pattern), or mute out
Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 when in Original
(the Original accompaniment pattern). This has the effect of
making the accompaniment more lively when you change
the accompaniment pattern from Original to Variation.
Display
R
Part
1 . Touch the Part you want to mute out at the Style
Rhythm
Composer screen.
B
Bass
A1
Accompaniment 1
Accompaniment 2
Accompaniment 3
2 . Press the button to switch to the Division that you
A2
want to silence.
fig.07-04.eps
A3
<All Clear> Erase all of the data that has been input.
<Mute>
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in
specific Divisions. For more information, take
Select the Division
<Clear>
Cancels the selection of the Style.
<Options> Displays the Part Settings screen, in which you
can make detailed settings for each part. For
3 . Touch <Mute> on the screen.
The Part you chose is muted out in just the Division you
selected. If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch
<Mute> again.
<Execute> This records the style you have composed.
To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds
(intro, ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately
after switching to the Division.
Touch here when you finished creating a style.
4 . Touch the screen to choose the Part whose style
you want to change.
The Part you touched appears in reverse video.
5 . Press the Music Style button, then choose a Style
by using the Touch Screen, the Value [-] [+]
buttons or the dial.
6 . After you’ve chosen a style, touch <Exit> to
display the Style Composer screen.
7 . Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 to determine the style for
each Part.
8 . When you have finished setting the Styles for all
Parts, touch <Execute>.
You create a new Style.
The User Style is recorded to the [Disk/ User] button. Try
playing with the created Style to play.
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you don’t want to
lose it, you should save it on a floppy disk. Take a look at
1 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r Ea ch Pa rt
● Cre a tin g a Sty le fro m a So n g
Yo u Co m p o se d Yo u rse lf (Sty le
1 . At the Style Composer screen, touch <Options>.
Co n ve rte r)
The following screen will appear.
fig.07-05.eps
You can take a song you’ve composed yourself and extract
the portions you need to create your own original Style.
Note that when you’re composing a song, there’s no need to
specify all the chords. You can specify just some of the
chords, and working on that, the KF-90 automatically
extrapolates the other chords, and arranges the style.
The Style Converter has an “Auto Mode” for creating Music
Styles simply from a song with a single chord, and a
“Manual Mode” for creating a Music Style from a song of
three chords (major, minor, and diminished seventh).
When you’re creating a song for User Style, think about the
structure of the style.
2 . Press Part < > and < > to choose the Part that
contains the settings you want to change.
The Part number and the tone name is displayed at the
top of the screen.
Th e Ma k e u p o f a Sty le
A Music Style is made up of five performance parts:
“Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment
2,” and “Accompaniment 3.”
3 . Touch the corresponding
to change the
Also, a song progresses in a sequence, such as intro, melody
A, melody B, bridge, and ending.
settings for each item.
Display Description
With the KF-90, such changes in songs are allocated to the
following six performance states. The six performance states
are called “Divisions” for Style.
Volume Adjusts the volume level.
Reverb Adjusts the depth of the reverb effect.
Chorus Adjusts the amount of chorus.
Division
Intro
Performance division
Panpot Shifts the direction the sound is heard from to the
The intro is played at the start of a song.
This is played at the end of a song.
This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
left or right. Touch
right, or touch
to shift the sound to the
to shift it to the left.
Ending
Original
Variation
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing the Tone Select button.
This is a developmental
accompaniment pattern.
4 . When you’re done changing the settings, touch
<Exit>.
Fill In To Variation This is a one-measure phrase inserted
at a juncture where the mood changes.
It is used to make a song more lively.
The Style Composer screen appears.
Fill In To Original This is a one-measure phrase inserted
at a juncture where the mood changes.
It is used to make a song more sedate.
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
increasing or reducing performance parts by Divisions. You
can also modify a song by changing the tone of the
performance parts by Divisions.
1 3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
Display
Description
Cre a tin g a Sty le in Au to Mo d e
Conv. Mode
Changes the Style Converter Mode (Auto/
Manual)
Tip s o n cre a tin g a so n g
•
Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh
chords to create the song. We recommend using
diminished seventh chords to compose the song.
It can be convenient to record the sounds shown below
for the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
Key
The basic key of the recorded performance
Src. Chord
The chord of the recorded performance
(Major/ Minor/ 7th)
•
Division
From
Division
The first measure in the passage you want
to extract
Rhythm
Bass
Accomp1 Accomp2 Accomp3
D (10)
2
7
8
9
For
The number of measures to extract
● If you want to extract the performance of a part other than
5 . Touch <Conv. Mode>, then use the Value [-] [+]
buttons or the dial to switch to “Auto.”
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.
1 . Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
6 . Touch <Key> and <Src. Chord>, then use the
Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to enter the basic
key and chord for the recorded song.
and record the song.
2 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
7 . Touch <Division> and use the Value [-] [+]
buttons or the dial to choose a division.
3 . Touch <Create Style>.
Display
Intro
Performance division
Intro
4 . Touch <Style Converter>.
Original
Original accompaniment pattern
* If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
Fill to Vari Fill-in to Variation
one shown below appears.
Variation
Fill to Org
Ending
Variation accompaniment pattern
fig.07-07.eps
Fill-in to Original
Ending
* If you select “Fill to Vari” (Fill-in to Variation) or “Fill to
Org” (Fill-in to Original) as the Division, you can only
extract one measure. The number of measures may be limited
for other Divisions as well.
•
•
Touch <Cancel> to return the Style Navigator screen.
Please save the User Style on a floppy disk or in the
8 . Touch <From> and <For>, and use the Value [-]
Touch <OK> to erase the previous User Style.
[+] buttons or the dial to choose the measures you
A Style Converter Screen like the one shown below
appears.
want to extract.
Touching <Play>, you can listen to performance of the
portion which you chose.
fig.07-08.eps
9 . Repeat steps 7 and 8 to make the settings for all
Divisions.
* If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum
pattern.
1 0 .When you’re done making all the Division
settings, touch <Execute>.
The User Style is recorded to the [Disk/ User] button.
1 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you don’t want to
lose it, you should save it on a floppy disk or in the internal
Ch a n g in g a n Ex tra cte d Pa rt
You can choose which part of the 16-track sequencer to
extract the performance from.
1 . Touch <Options> at the Style Converter screen.
* The data described below is saved in a User Style. If a song
includes data other than this, the results you get might not be
what was intended.
The following screen will appear.
fig.07-07.e
• Keyboard performance information
• Depth of Reverb
• Amount of Chorus
Cre a tin g a Sty le in Ma n u a l Mo d e
When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each
individual chord.
2 . Choose the performance Part you want to change,
and press the Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to
determine which 16-track Sequencer part has the
performance you want to extract.
Tip s o n cre a tin g a so n g
•
Record your performance with the three chord types of
diminished seventh, major, and minor.
•
It can be convenient to record the sounds shown below
for the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
* In the Manual Mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of
the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.
Chords Rhythm
Bass
3
Accomp1 Accomp2 Accomp3
3 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
Major
D(10)
4
7
5
8
6
9
Sevens
Minor
-
-
2
12
13
14
15
● The chords all share the same Rhythm Part.
● If you want to use the performance of other part, check out
“Changing an Extracted Part.”
1 . Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
and record the song.
2 . Press the [Style Navigator] button.
3 . Touch <Create Style>.
4 . Touch <Style Converter>.
5 . Touch <Conv. Mode>, then use the Value [-] [+]
or the dial to switch to “Manual.”
This makes the setting for the Manual mode.
● You can listen to a performance of the part selected with
<Options> by touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen.
1 3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
Sa vin g a Use r Sty le
6 . After you’ve enter the style name, use
to
choose the destination for saving it.
You can save a User Style you’ve created on a floppy disk or
the [Disk/ User] button (the KF-90’s internal memory).
When you save a User Style to the [Disk/ User] button, the
style doesn’t disappear even when you switch off the power.
You can choose the saved User Style by pressing the [Disk/
User] button. You can save up to 3 User Styles on the [Disk/
User] button.
* If you select a location where a User Style has already been
saved, the previously saved User Style is erased and the new
one is saved.
Touching <Exit> takes you back to the previous screen
without saving the User Style.
7 . Touch <Save> on the screen.
● Sa vin g o n th e Flo p p y Disk
1 . Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive.
The saving process starts.
* Don’t take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving
process is finished.
2 . Press the [Disk/User] button.
The Disk/ User screen will appear.
fig.07-08.e
● Sa ving on the [Disk / User] b utton
1 . Press the [Disk/User] button.
The Disk/ User screen will appear.
2 . Touch <Memorize>.
3 . Touch <Disk>.
4 . Touch <Save>.
The following screen is called up.
fig.07-09.e
3 . Enter the name of the style and choose the
destination for saving it following the step 5 and
6 described in “Saving on the Floppy Disk.”
4 . Touch <Execute>.
The User style is stored on the KF-90’s [Disk/ User]
button.
* Never try to switch off the power while this operation is in
progress. Doing so may damage the internal memory, making
it impossible to use this instrument.
5 . Touch
to scroll the cursor sideways, and
enter the name of the style by using the Value [-]
● You can return the settings stored on the [Disk/User] button
[+] buttons or the dial to choose the letters.
Touch <A-a-0-!> at the bottom of the screen to change
the type of script.
* Attempting to save a User Style containing a lot of
performance data to the [Disk/User] button may cause another
User Style to be erased.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
To delete the character under the cursor, touch <_>.
1 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
● De le tin g a Use r Sty le Sa ve d o n
Flo p p y Disk
Sto rin g th e Pa n e l Se ttin g s
(Use r Pro g ra m )
You can erase a User Style saved on a floppy disk.
You can store the presently selected buttons, feature settings,
and the like to the [User Program] button (internal memory).
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User
Program] button. This is handy for storing often-used
combinations of styles, tone, and other settings. Such a set of
stored settings is called a “User Program.”
1 . Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
2 . Press the [Disk/User] button.
3 . Touch <Disk>.
fig.07-11.e
With the KF-90, you can store up to 36 User Programs in
memory.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
The following screen will appear.
fig.07-14.e
4 . Touch <Delete>.
fig.07-12.e
2 . Touch <Memorize>.
The following screen is called up.
fig.07-15.e
5 . Touch
to select the Style you want to
delete.
6 . Touch <Delete> on screen.
The following screen will appear.
g.07-13.e
3 . Touch
to scroll the cursor sideways, and
enter the name of the button by using the Value
[-] [+] buttons or the dial to choose the letters.
Touch <A-a-0-!> at the bottom of the screen to change
the type of script.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
7 . Touch <OK>.
The Style selected is deleted.
Touching <Cancel> cancels deleting the Style.
To delete the character under the cursor, touch <_>.
1 3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
4 . After you’ve entered a name, touch
choose a destination for saving the button
settings.
to
Ca llin g Up Use r Pro g ra m
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
2 . Touch the name of the User Program you want to
5 . Touch <Execute> on the screen.
call up.
The present panel settings (User Program) are stored on
the KF-90’s [User Program] button.
If the User Program you want to call up is not displayed,
touch Page < > and < > to switch screens.
Touching the User Program name changes the panel
settings to the stored values.
* Never try to switch off the power while this operation is in
progress. Doing so may damage the internal memory, making
it impossible to use this instrument.
● You can return the settings stored on the [User Program]
● Ch a n g in g Ho w Bu tto n Se ttin g s
Are Ca lle d Up
If you wish, for times when you call up a User Program, you
can set it so settings related to automatic accompaniment
aren’t changed unless you continue touching the Touch
Screen for a certain period of time.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
2 . Touch <Options>.
A screen like the one shown below appear.
fig.07-16.e
3 . Touch <Instant> or <Delayed>.
Display
Description
Instant
The settings related to automatic
accompaniment are also switched right away
when you touch the screen.
Delayed
To change the settings related to automatic
accompaniment, touch and continue pressing
the screen for a short while.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
1 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
Sa vin g Use r Pro g ra m s o n
Flo p p y Disk
6 . After you’ve entered a name, touch
to
choose a destination for saving the User Program.
* If you save a User Program at a place where another User
Program has already been saved, the previously saved User
Program is erased and the new one is saved.
You can save all User Programs now stored on the [User
Program] button (internal memory) on floppy disk as a
single set.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
1 . Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
7 . Touch <Save> to start saving.
● You can erase a User Program saved on a floppy disk. Take a
2 . Press the [User Program] button.
* Don’t take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving
process is finished.
3 . Touch <Disk>.
fig.07-17.e
● Ca llin g Up Sa ve d Use r
Pro g ra m s fro m Flo p p y Disk
You can call up an entire set of User Programs saved on
floppy disk to the [User Program] button.
* Please note that calling up User Programs from floppy disk
erases all User Programs stored at the [User Program] button.
1 . Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
4 . Touch <Save>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.07-18.e
2 . Press the [User Program] button.
3 . Touch <Disk>.
4 . Touch <Load>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.07-19.e
5 . Touch
and
to scroll the cursor sideways,
and enter the name of the button by using the
Value [-] [+] buttons or the dial to choose the
letters.
Touch <A-a-0-!> at the bottom of the screen to change
the type of script.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
5 . Touch the screen to select the User Program set
you want to call up.
6 . Touch <Load> at the bottom of the screen.
To delete the character under the cursor, touch <_>.
The User Program saved on a floppy disk will be loaded
to the [User Program] button (internal memory).
1 4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Usin g O th e r Fu n ctio n s
● Era sin g a Use r Pro g ra m Sa ve d
o n a Flo p p y Disk
You can erase an entire set of User Programs saved on a
floppy disk.
Disa b lin g Eve ry th in g Ex ce p t
Pia n o Pla y (Pa n e l Lo ck )
Making the setting for the panel lock enables a state where
only piano play is possible, and all buttons are disabled.
Even if the buttons are pressed mistakenly, such as might be
the case with children, no unwanted settings or changes will
result.
1 . Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
* When the panel is locked, only Grand Piano sounds are played.
2 . Press the [User Program] button.
1 . Turn down the volume all the way.
3 . Touch <Disk>.
A screen like the one shown below appear.
fig.07-17.e
2 . Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.
3 . While holding down the [Function] button, press
the [Power] switch to turn the power on.
Then, continue to hold down these two buttons for a few
seconds.
4 . Adjust the volume.
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
When you play the keyboard Grand Piano tone is
played.
4 . Touch <Delete> on the screen.
By turning the power off and then on once again, the
keyboard returns to its normal status with Panel Lock
cancelled.
The following screen will appear.
fig.07-21.e
5 . Touch
want to erase.
to choose the User Program you
6 . Touch <Delete> on the screen.
The following screen will appear.
g.07-13.e
7 . Touch <OK>.
The selected User Program is erased.
Touching <Cancel> takes you back to the previous
screen without deleting the User Program.
1 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ad d in g Am b ie n ce fro m
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r
O n e To u ch Pia n o
Diffe re n t Ve n u e s to So n g s
(Am b ie n ce )
You can change settings related to the piano performance in
the Piano Customize screen.
You can savor the same atmosphere as experienced when
performing in a concert hall, studio and other venues.
These settings remains in effect until you turn off the power.
1 . At the Piano Customize screen, touch
<Ambience>.
screen shown below.
fig.08-01.eps
The following screen will appear.
fig.08-03.eps
This is called the Piano Customize screen.
You can make the settings for an item by touching the
corresponding icon.
2 . Touch the
and
icon to select the type of
performance space.
Indication
Description
Indication
Description
Ambience
This lets you enjoy the atmosphere of
performance in a wide variety of different
locations.
Ground
Room
On a large open ground
In a small room
A large room
Lounge
Studio
Gymnasium
Hall
Tuning
Changes the tuning of the piano.
A recording studio
In a gymnasium
Concert hall
Resonance
Key Touch
Adjusts the Sympathetic Resonance.
Adjusts the “touch,” or response of the
keys.
Dome
A domed ballpark
In a cavern
Sound
This lets you make more detailed
adjustments to the piano’s tone.
Cave
3 . Touch the “Mode” icon to select the size of
● What’s Sympathetic Resonance?
performance space.
When you depress the damper pedal on an acoustic piano,
the sound from the strings that were struck resonates with
other strings, adding rich reverberations and broadness to
the sound. This resonance is called “Sympathetic
Resonance.”
Indication
Std
Description
This is the normal condition.
Wide
Provides an effect simulating the sound as it
would be perceived in a larger, wider space.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Piano Customize screen.
* When you change the <Ambience> setting in the Piano
Customize screen, the way in which reverb is applied may
change.
1 4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Mean Tone
This scale makes some compromises in just
intonation, enabling transposition to other
keys.
● Ch a n g in g th e Tu n in g
Ch o o sin g th e Tu n in g
Pythagorean
This scale devised by the philosopher
Pythagoras eliminates dissonance in fourths
and fifths. Dissonance is produced by third-
interval chords, but melodies are
euphonious.
You can play classical music such as baroque pieces using
their original tuning.
Most modern songs are composed and played with the
assumption that equal temperament (the most common
tuning in use today) will be used, but when classical music
was composed, there were a wide variety of other tuning
systems in existence. Playing a composition with its original
tuning lets you enjoy the sonorities of the chords that the
composer originally intended.
Werckmeister This is a combination of the mean tone and
Pythagorean scales. Performances are
possible in all keys (first technique, III).
3 . Touch
to choose the keynote.
When playing with tuning other than equal
temperament, you need to specify the ground note for
tuning the song to be performed (that is, the note that
corresponds to C for a major key or to A for a minor
key).
<Tuning>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.08-06.eps
If you choose an equal temperament, there’s no need to
select a keynote.
Ch a n g in g th e Tu n in g Cu rve
A piano is generally tuned to a pitch with a lower bass range
and a higher treble range than equal temperament. This
special tuning method for pianos is called “Stretch Tuning.”
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.
2 . Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning
system.
You can choose from among the eight tunings described
below.
1 . Touch the <Stretch Tuning> icon to choose the
Tuning system Characteristics
tuning curve.
Equal
This tuning divides an octave into 12 equal
parts. Every interval produces about the same
amount of slight dissonance. This setting is in
effect when you turn on the power.
Display
Characteristics
ON
This tuning curve expands the bass and treble
ends somewhat (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for
performances such as piano solos. This setting is
in effect when you turn on the power.
Just Major
Just Minor
This scale eliminates dissonance in fifths
and thirds. It is unsuited to playing
melodies and cannot be transposed, but
produces beautiful chords.
OFF
This is the standard tuning curve. It is suitable
when playing layered tones, or for playing in
ensemble with other instruments.
The scales of the major and minor just
intonations are different. You can get the
same effect with the minor scale as with the
major scale.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Piano Customize screen.
Arabic
This scale is suitable for Arabic music.
Kirnberger
This scale is a modification of the meantone
and just intonations that permits greater
freedom in transposition to other keys.
Performances are possible in all keys (III).
1 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ad ju stin g Re so n a n ce
You can adjust this resonance (Sympathetic Resonance)
when the damper pedal is depressed.
●
Ch a n g in g Ke y To u ch (Ke y To u ch )
You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you finger the
keys.
<Resonance>.
<Key Touch>.
The following screen will appear.
The following screen will appear.
fig.08-07.eps
fig.08-04.eps
2 . Touch the <Standard>, <Advanced>, or <Demo>
2 . Touch the <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or
<Heavy> icon to make the setting for keyboard
touch.
icon to choose the type of resonant sound.
Indication
Standard
Advanced
Description
Indication
Description
This replicates the resonance inside a piano.
Fixed
Notes are sounded at an unchanging volume
level, regardless of how lightly or forcefully
you finger the keyboard.
This physically reproduces the vibrations
imparted to other free strings when a key is
played, so it can give you the same feel as the
reverberations of an acoustic piano.
Light
This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard
feels lighter. This setting makes it easy to play,
even for children.
Demo
In addition to the effects of Advanced, this also
replicates the noise when you depress the
pedal.
3 . Touch
to adjust the amount of
Medium
Heavy
This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.
You can play with the most natural touch. This
is the closest to the touch of an acoustic piano.
Resonance Sound.
Touching
intensifies the effect; touch
to reduce
This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You
have to finger the keyboard more forcefully
than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so
the keyboard touch feels heavier. Dynamic
fingering adds even more feeling to what you
play.
the amount of effect.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Piano Customize screen.
value.
● When you’ve chosen <Demo>, touching <Exit> changes the
3 . To make fine adjustments, touch the bar graph.
setting for resonant notes to <Advanced>.
The on-screen bar graph shows the keyboard touch.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Piano Customize screen.
1 4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Fin e Ad ju stm e n t o f th e Pia n o
To n e
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r
Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
You can make more detailed adjustments to the piano’s tone.
You can change a variety of settings for automatic
accompaniment.
<Sound>.
The following screen will appear.
fig.08-06.e
The following screen like the one is called “Arranger Option
screen.”
fig.08-08.eps
2 . Touch the icons on the screen to adjust the piano
sound.
● Ch a n g in g th e Ke y b o a rd ’s Sp lit
Indication
Description
Po in t
Dynamic Range
Adjusts the range of change in the tone
made in response to velocity, or the
force with which the keys are played.
Select “Wide” to widen the dynamic
range of the sound; select “Narrow” to
narrow the dynamic range.
You can change the location where the keyboard is divided
(the split point).
The setting is at “F#3” when the piano is powered up.
fig.08-09
F 3 (Split Point)
Brightness
Release
Allows you to change the brightness of
the piano tone.
B1
B6
Select “Bright” to brighten the sound;
select “Dark” to make the sound
darker.
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the Basic screen.
Sets the length of decay of the sound
after the keys are released.
2 . Touch <Options> at the bottom right of the
screen.
Select “Long” to lengthen the sound’s
release time; select “Short” to shorten
the sound’s release.
3 . Touch <Split Point> to display the screen shown
below.
fig.08-10.eps
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Piano Customize screen.
4 . Touch <C3>, <F#3>, <C4> or <F#4>.
The key you chose becomes the split point.
● The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
1 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ch a n g in g th e Ch o rd To n e a n d
Ba ss To n e
5 . To make another key the split point, touch
to move the cursor on screen.
You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone.
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Arranger Option screen.
W h a t Are th e Ch o rd To n e a n d Ba ss To n e ?
When automatic accompaniment is stopped and the [Sync/
Reset] button’s indicator is dark, fingering the left-hand
section of the keyboard causes a chord to be sounded. This is
called the “chord tone,” and the root of the chord that is
played at the same time is called the “bass tone.”
● Ch a n g in g Ho w th e Au to m a tic
Acco m p a n im e n t Pla y s
You can set it the setting so that instead of sounding all the
parts of a Music Style, only the Music Style’s rhythm part,
chord tone, and bass tone are played.
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the Basic screen.
2 . At the Basic screen, touch <Options> at the
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
bottom right of the screen.
to display the Basic screen.
3 . Touch <Arranger Config.> to make the following
2 . At the Basic screen, touch <Options> at the
screen appear in the display.
fig.08-10.e
bottom right of the screen.
3 . Touch <Arranger Config.> to display a screen like
the one shown below.
fig.08-10.e
4 . Touch
Bass Tone, and touch
to choose the Chord Tone.
of <Bass Tone> to choose the
of <Chord Tone>
4 . Use <Accomp>
to choose the tone you
When “OFF” is selected, the bass tone or chord tone
sound is muted.
want to play.
Tone
Available tones
Indication
Description
Sounds all Parts of the Music Style.
Bass Tone OFF, Acoustic Bs., A.Bass + Cymbl, Fingered
Bs., Picked Bs., Fretless Bs., Slap Bass, Organ
Bass, SynthBass101, Thum Voice
Accomp
Chord&Bs Only the Music Style’s rhythm part, chord
tone, and bass tone are sounded.
Code Tone OFF, E.Piano 1, E.Piano 2, Soft E.Piano, Hard
E.Piano, Slow Strings, Strings, Choir, Doos
Voice
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Arranger Option screen.
● For more on Chord Tones and Bass Tones, refer to the section
“Changing the Chord Tone and Bass Tone,” which follows.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Arranger Option screen.
1 4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
3 . Touch <One Touch Setting> to display a screen
like the one shown below.
fig.08-14.eps
● Ca n ce lin g th e Ch o rd
In te llig e n ce Fu n ctio n
Automatic Accompaniment that instantly recognizes the
accompaniment chord that is to be played, merely when you
press the key specifying the chord (the root). Although the
Chord Intelligence function is normally turned on when you
press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button and have
Automatic Accompaniment play, you can turn off the Chord
Intelligence function in the following screen.
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the Basic screen.
4 . Touch the icons to switch On/Off.
This feature is on when the icon has a white background,
and off when the background is black.
2 . At the Basic screen, touch <Options> at the
bottom right of the screen.
Indication
Description
3 . Touch <Arranger Config.> to make the following
Suitable Tone The suitable tone for a Music Style will be
screen appear in the display.
fig.08-10.e
selected automatically.
Suitable Tempo The suitable tempo for a Music Style will
be selected automatically.
Other Setting
Other settings (Style Orchestrator settings,
Phrase, etc.) are changed automatically.
The parameters that are turned off do not change, even
when the Music Style is changed.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Arranger Option screen.
●
Assig n in g Fu n ctio n s to Pe d a ls
You can assign a variety of different functions to the soft
pedal and the sostenuto pedal.
4 . Touch the <Chord Intelli>
to select
You can then call up the assigned feature simply by pressing
the corresponding pedal.
“ON” or “OFF.”
Indication Description
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
ON
The Chord Intelligence function can be used.
to display the Basic screen.
OFF
The Chord Intelligence function cannot be used.
You have to finger all the keys to specify the
chord.
2 . At the Basic screen, touch <Options> at the
bottom right of the screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Arranger Option screen.
3 . Touch <Pedal Setting> to display a screen like the
one shown below.
fig.08-13.eps
● Ke e p in g th e Sa m e To n e a n d
Te m p o W h e n th e Mu sic Sty le
Ch a n g e s
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the default setting
has the tone in the right hand and the tempo selected
automatically. This setting prevents the tempo and tone from
changing, even when the Music Style is changed.
All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the Basic screen.
4 . Touch
desired pedal.
to assign the function to the
2 . At the Basic screen, touch <Options> at the
bottom right of the screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Arranger Option screen.
1 4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Glide
The sound’s pitch is temporarily
lowered while the Glide pedal is
pressed; when the pedal is released,
the pitch gradually returns to normal.
This can be effective for simulating
the performance of instruments like a
Hawaiian guitar.
● Assignable Functions
Indication
Description
Leading Bass
Toggles the Leading Bass function on
or off. It is turned on while you
depress the pedal.
Break
During a performance with
automatic accompaniment, you can
stop the accompaniment for exactly
one measure.
Composer Play/Stop This does the same thing as the Play
] button and the Stop [ ] button.
[
Punch In/Out
During Punch-in Recording, this
Fill In to Variation
Fill In to Original
Fill In
This does the same thing as the Fill In
Tap Tempo
This sets the tempo according to the
timing with which you tap the button
This does the same thing as the Fill In
Upper Soft
The pedal in the left functions the
A fill-in is inserted, but the
accompaniment pattern after that
doesn’t change.
Upper Sostenuto
Lower Damper
The pedal in the middle functions the
Half Fill In Variation This play a fill-in half a measure long,
then switches to the Variation
This applies lingering reverberations
to notes played with the left-hand
section of the keyboard while the
damper pedal is depressed.
accompaniment pattern.
Half Fill In Original
This plays a fill-in half a measure
long, then switches to the Original
accompaniment pattern.
Bend Up
This raises the pitch of notes you play
on the keyboard.
Original/Variation
Arranger Reset
This changes the accompaniment
pattern without inserting a fill-in.
Bend Down
This lowers the pitch of notes you
play on the keyboard.
Using this function while Automatic
Accompaniment is in use returns the
accompaniment to the start of the
Division.
W h a t is th e Le a d in g Ba ss fu n ctio n ?
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord
as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When set to “ON,”
the bass tone changes when an inverted chord is used.
Usually the tonic of the fingered chord is sounded as the bass
tone.
Intro 1/Ending 1
Intro 2/Ending 2
This does the same thing as the
This does the same thing as the
● If you’ve assigned “Leading Bass” to a pedal, the Leading Bass
Arranger Start/Stop This does the same thing as the
function is active while you depress the pedal.
● When the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function is used with
right hand are then altered. Additionally, the maximum degree
of change in the pitch when the Bender effect is used is called
Orchestrator Up
This changes the automatic
accompaniment to a more florid
arrangement.
Orchestrator Down This changes the automatic
accompaniment to a simpler
arrangement.
W h a t’s th e Be n d Ra n g e ?
Melody Intelligence This toggles the Melody Intelligence
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is known as the “Bender Effect,” and the pitch’s
range of change is called the “Bend Range.” With the KF-90,
you can apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing
a pedal.
Fade In/Out
This starts automatic accompaniment
with a fade-in (where the volume
gets progressively louder), ends it
with a fade-out (where the volume
gets progressively softer), then stops.
* Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button returns the
Rotary Slow/Fast
This switches the speed of the rotary
1 4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Display
Lower Part Lower Track, 1–16
Select the part to be displayed as
Value
Description
Ch a n g in g th e se ttin g s fo r
Sco re scre e n
the left-hand part. The power-
up default is “Lower Track.”
You can set which parts are displayed, and how the scores
are to be displayed.
Upper Part Upper Track, 1–16
1 . Press the [Song/Disk] button.
Select the part to be displayed as
the right-hand part. The power-
up default is “Upper Track.”
A Song/ Disk screen appears.
2 . Touch <Score>.
User Part
Whole Track, 1–16
Select the part used for
recording your performance.
The power-up default is “Whole
Track.”
3 . Touch <Option> at the bottom of the screen.
The following screens appears.
This screen consists of two pages. Use Page < > and
<
> to change pages.
4 . Touch
to set each setting.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Score screen.
Ch a n g in g th e To n e Se t W h e n
Pla y in g Ba ck a So n g
When playing back song data, the data is normally set to be
played back using GS tones (tones compatible with other GS
devices). By changing the settings, you can play back
portions of the data using tones particular to the KF-90.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
Display
Value
Description
Pitches
C,D,E
Letter names (fixed do) are
displayed in the detailed score.
Solmization syllables (movable
do) are displayed in the detailed
score.
2 . Touch <Play Mode>.
The following screen appears.
fig.08-13.e
Do,Re,Mi
Off
Not displayed
Clef L
Clef R
Key
Auto
Changes automatically
Display the G-clef staff of the
left-hand part
G Clef
F Clef
Display the F-clef staff of the
left-hand part
G Clef
F Clef
Display the G-clef staff of the
right-hand part
3 . Touch an icon to select the setting.
Display the F-clef staff of the
right-hand part
Display Description
GS
KF
Playback uses GS-compatible tones. Result is same
as that from any other GS instrument.
Auto
Auto
Changes automatically
Display automatically
Playback will use KF tones for some tones. This
will make the performance more expressive.
However when the data is played back on non-KF
models, the nuances of the performance may be
different.
b x 5–0–# x 6 Display the score in the selected
key
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
1 4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Voice(JP)
A voice counting “1, 2” in Japanese
A voice counting “1, 2” in English
Wood Block
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r th e
Ma rk e r a n d th e Co u n t So u n d
Voice(ENG)
Wood Block
You can set markers at points within measures and change
the sound used with the CountIn feature. To change these
settings, use the following procedure to bring up the
“Marker Option Screen.”
Triangle/Castanet Triangle and castanet sound
Handclap
Animal
Clapping
Animal Voice
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.
1 . Press the [Composer Navigator] button.
The Composer Navigator screen appears.
2 . Touch <Marker/Count In>.
● Pla y in g th e Co u n t So u n d a t
Ea ch Re p e titio n
You can choose whether the count is sounded at every
repetition when you repeat playback of a song or a particular
passage.
3 . At the Marker screen, touch <Option> at the
bottom right of the screen.
The following screen will appear.
fig.08-22.eps
1 . Display the Marker Option screen.
2 . Select the way this is to be played with the
<Repeat>
.
Indication
Description
First Time
The count is sounded only before the first
playback.
Every Time
The count-in is sounded each time the song
is played.
This is called the “Marker Option screen.”
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.
● Ch a n g in g th e N u m b e r o f
Me a su re s Co u n te d a n d th e
Co u n t So u n d
When you’ve made the setting for sounding an audible count
counted, as well as the type of counting sound.
● Pla cin g a Ma rk e r in th e Mid d le
o f a Me a su re
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected
measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a
position partway through a measure.
1 . Display the Marker Option screen.
1 . Display the Marker Option screen.
2 . Touch <Resolution>
to choose the
2 . Use <Measure>
to choose the number of
marker setting.
measures to count and the count sound.
Indication
Description
Indication
Description
1
2
The one-bar count will sound.
The two-bar count will sound.
Measure
This lets you place a marker at the beginning
of the measure.
Beat
This lets you place a marker at each beat.
3 . Use <Sound>
Indication
Sticks
to choose the count sound.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.
Description
* When “Beat” is selected for this setting, place the markers
while the song is played back.
Sound of tapping with a stick
A bell and a clicking sound
Electronic sound
Click
Electronic
1 5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Ad ju stin g th e Sta n d a rd Pitch
(Ma ste r Tu n in g )
Ch a n g in g th e Ty p e o f Re ve rb
Effe ct
The standard pitch generally refers to the pitch of the note
that’s played when you finger the middle A key. For a
cleaner ensemble sound while performing with one or more
other instruments, ensure that each instrument’s basic pitch
is in tune with that of the other instruments. This tuning of
all the instruments to a standard pitch is called “Master
Tuning.”
By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy
the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different
locations.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
The Function screen appears.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
3 . Touch <Effect/Bend>.
The Function screen appears.
If <Effect/ Bend> is not displayed, touch Page < > and
<
> to switch screens.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
fig.08-16.e
fig.08-23.eps
4 . Touch <Reverb Type>
to change the
3 . Touch <Master Tune>.
type of reverb.
If <Master Tune> is not displayed, touch Page < > and
<
> to switch screens.
Display
Room 1
Room 2
Type Description
fig.08-23.eps
Simulates the reverb of a conference room
Simulates the reverb of a performance
lounge
Room 3
Hall 1
Hall 2
Plate
Simulates the reverb of a large, open room
Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall
Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
Applies a bright, metallic reverb
Delay
Repeats the sound many times, like an echo
Panning Delay Makes the sound jump back and forth
4 . Touch
to change the standard pitch.
between the left and right speakers
The standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3–
466.2 Hz. The setting is at “440.0 Hz” when the piano is
powered up.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
* Changing the type of Reverb effect may also change the setting
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
1 5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Ch a n g in g th e Ty p e o f Ch o ru s
Effe ct
Ch a n g in g th e Be n d Ra n g e
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is called the “Bender Effect.”
With the KF-90, you can assign the bender effect to a pedal,
then apply the bender by depressing and releasing the pedal
the chorus effect type.
* If <Depth> is set to “0” when the “Chorus” effect is selected
in the Effect Screen, the chorus effect is not applied to the
sound.
You can also make a setting that determines how much the
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The
maximum range of change in pitch is called the “Bend
Range.”
1 . Press the [Function] button.
The Function screen appears.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
The Function screen appears.
3 . Touch <Effect/Bend>.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
If <Effect/ Bend> is not displayed, touch Page < > and
<
> to switch screens.
3 . Touch <Effect/Bend>.
fig.08-16.e
If <Effect/ Bend> is not displayed, touch Page < > and
<
> to switch screens.
fig.08-16.e
4 . Use <Chorus Type>
to change the type
of chorus effect.
4 . Use <Bend Range>
to set the bend
Display
Type Description
range.
Chorus 1
Applies a light chorus effect with
slow undulations
You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in
half-tone steps, up to one octave).
Chorus 2
Chorus 3
Chorus 4
Applies a light chorus effect with
quick undulations
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
Applies a deep chorus effect with
slow undulations
Applies a deep chorus effect with
quick undulations
Feedback Chorus
Short Delay
Flanger
A soft sound with a flanger effect
A short echo effect
An effect that sounds like a jet
plane’s ascent/ descent
Short Delay (Feedback) A short echo with many repetitions
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
1 5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Ch a n g in g th e Scre e n Se ttin g s
Ch a n g in g th e Scre e n Me ssa g e
W h e n th e Po w e r Is Tu rn e d O n
(O p e n in g Me ssa g e )
Some karaoke Music Files show lyrics on screen. You can
hide the on-screen lyrics displayed by such music files. With
the KF-90, you can also change the language and vary the
contrast of the screen.
You can select the words and other messages you want to
have displayed on the KF-90’s screen when the power is
turned on.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
The Function screen appears.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
The Function screen appears.
3 . Touch <Display/Language>.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
If <Display/ Language> is not displayed, touch Page
3 . Touch <Opening Message>.
<
> and < > to switch screens.
If <Opening Message> is not displayed, touch Page
fig.08-29.eps
<
> and < > to switch screens.
fig.08-27.eps
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
4 . Use
to scroll the cursor, and
● Hid in g th e O n -scre e n Ly rics
* This setting is enabled only when playing back music files that
enter the message by using Value [-] [+] button or
the dial to choose the letters.
Touch <A-a-0-!> at the bottom of the screen to change
the type of script.
include the lyrics.
1 . Touch <Lyric>
to choose the setting.
Indication
Description
Touching <_> inserts a blank space at the cursor
location.
On
Lyrics are displayed (when performance data
containing lyrics is played back).
5 . When you’re done entering the text, touch
<Execute>.
Off
Lyrics are not displayed.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
● Ch a n g in g th e La n g u a g e
* Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress.
Doing so can damage the internal memory, making it
impossible to use this instrument.
1 . Use <Language>
to choose the language.
Indication: English, Japanese
● If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen, followed
by <Execute>, the piano will revert to using its original
opening message.
● Ad ju stin g th e Co n tra st o f th e
Scre e n
1 . Touch <Contrast>
to adjust the contrast
of the screen.
You can adjust the contrast level along a ten-stage range.
The higher the value set, the brighter it is displayed.
1 5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Ma in ta in in g Se ttin g s Afte r
th e Po w e r Is Tu rn e d O ff
(Me m o ry Ba ck u p )
Re sto rin g th e Fa cto ry
Se ttin g s (Fa cto ry Re se t)
You can restore the settings stored in memory with “Memory
function is called “Factory Reset.”
Ordinarily, when you turn off the power, settings return to
their default values. However, some settings can be stored,
so they won’t be discarded when you turn off the power.
This function is called “Memory Backup.”
* When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been
stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their
factory defaults.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
The Function screen appears.
3 . Touch <Memory Backup>.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
If <Memory Backup> is not displayed, touch Page <
>
3 . Touch <Factory Reset>.
and < > to switch screens.
fig.08-28.eps
If <Factory Reset> is not displayed, touch Page <
>
and < > to switch screens.
fig.08-29.eps
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
4 . Touch <Execute> on the screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
4 . Touch <Execute> on the screen.
5 . Touch <OK> to store the settings in memory.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
When the setting has been stored in memory, the
previous screen will reappear.
5 . Touch <OK> to restore the settings to their
factory defaults.
Touch <Cancel> to make the message disappear without
storing the settings.
When the setting is changed, the previous screen returns.
Turn the KF-90 off, then on again.
* Never switch off the power while a Memory Backup operation
is in progress. Doing so can damage the internal memory,
making it impossible to use this instrument.
Touch <Cancel> to make the message disappear without
changing the settings.
* Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!
Doing so can damage the internal memory, making it
impossible to use this instrument.
1 5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Ch a n g in g Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Re p o sitio n in g th e To u ch Scre e n
If you’ve been using the Touch Screen for some time, the
pointer may be shifted, making the KF-90 react incorrectly.
You should correct this displacement when necessary by
performing calibration (repositioning).
1 . Press the [Function] button.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
3 . Touch <Touch Screen>.
If <Touch Screen> is not displayed, touch Page <
>
and < > to switch screens.
fig.08-30.eps
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
4 . Touch <Execute> on the screen.
5 . Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.
* Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer
accurately.
6 . Touch <Memorize> at the bottom of screen to
store the setting of calibration to KF-90.
* If you turn the power off before doing step 6, the setting of
calibration will go away.
1 5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
By connecting the KF-90 to external devices such as audio
Co n n e ctin g MIDI De vice s
equipment and MIDI instruments, you can enjoying in the
following ways.
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
performance data, you can control the performances on one
device from the other. For instance, you can output sound
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance
from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other
data from the KF-90 or play performance data from the KF-90
instrument.
on the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound
module, you can perform on the KF-90 and hear the sounds
played through the MIDI sound module.
W h a t’s MIDI?
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was
developed as a standard for the exchange of performance
data between electronic instruments and computers.
The KF-90 is equipped with MIDI connectors and a
Computer connector to let it exchange performance data
with external devices. These connectors can be used to
connect the KF-90 to an external device for even greater
versatility.
You can use a sequencer program (such as Roland Visual-
MT) to record performance data from the KF-90 and play
performance data from the program on the KF-90.
The KF-90 has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you
can also hook up a stereo system, and enjoy performances
that are even more impressive.
* A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also
available. It provides complete details concerning the way
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require
this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service
Center or authorized Roland distributor.
You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording
equipment and record your performances.
● Co n n e cto rs
fig.09-
MIDI O u t Co n n e cto r
Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
Performance data when you finger the keyboard or depress a
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI
connector.
MIDI In Co n n e cto r
Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external
MIDI devices. The KF-90 that receives MIDI messages can
output sounds, exchange tones, and perform other
operations.
1 5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
● Ma k in g th e Co n n e ctio n s
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
MIDI Se ttin g s
With the KF-90, you can make MIDI settings like those
described below.
“MIDI Setting Screen”
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-90
Display
Description
and on the device you’re about to connect.
TX. Channel
Local Control
Composer Out
2 . Switch off the power to the KF-90 and the device
you’re about to connect.
Determines whether a recorded
performance is sent to the MIDI
3 . Set the Computer switch on the back of the unit
to “MIDI.”
4 . Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the
MIDI connectors to each other.
“Program Change Screen”
Program Change Sends Program Change messages
Please refer to the connection examples below.
5 . Switch on the power to the KF-90 and the
connected device.
6 . Adjust the volume level on the KF-90 and the
connected device.
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
7 . You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
Co n n e ctin g w ith MIDI Se q u e n ce r
3 . Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.
fig.09-04.eps
fig.09-10
MT Series
* The MT-80s has no MIDI Out
connector.
Out
MIDI
In
* When the KF-90 is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to
Local OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Keyboard from the
fig.09-04.eps
● Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module
fig.09-
Sound Module
MIDI
OUT
THRU
IN
4 . Touch
to make the setting for the
corresponding item.
Touch <Exit> or press the [Function] button to go back to
the previous screen.
1 5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
● Se le ctin g th e Tra n sm it Ch a n n e l
separated. No sound will be produced by the keyboard when
(Tx . Ch a n n e l)
it is played.
fig.09-
MIDI organizes things into “channels,” which are numbered
from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough
for communication to take place. The connected devices must
be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound
will be produced, and no sounds can be selected.
Select the transmit channel (1–16) of the KF-90.
The channel setting is at “1” when the KF-90 is powered up.
If the keyboard has been split into right-hand and left-hand
sections, messages from the left-hand section are not sent.
The KF-90 receives messages on all channels from 1 through
16.
No sound produced
Sound Generator
Local Off
● When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don’t
need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off
messages when their power is switched on. If you first switch
on the KF-90, then the MT-series device, Local Control is
automatically switched off on the KF-90.
● Disco n n e ctin g th e In te rn a l
So u n d Ge n e ra to r a n d
Ke y b o a rd (Lo ca l Co n tro l)
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to
“off.” The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KF-90 is
powered up.
● Se n d in g Re co rd e d
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta to a MIDI
As illustrated, information describing what has been played
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,
route (1) must be severed, by setting the unit to what is
De vice (Co m p o se r O u t)
When Composer Out is active, you can send performance
data recorded with the KF-90 to a connected MIDI device or
computer.
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not
sent).
known as “Local Off.”
fig.09-
Local On
(1)
● Se n d in g To n e Ch a n g e
Sequencer
Memory
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Me ssa g e s (Pro g ra m Ch a n g e /
Ba n k Se le ct MSB/ Ba n k Se le ct LSB)
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the
tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this
changes to the tone of the corresponding number.
When you choose a Program Change message (Program
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the
MIDI device connected to the KF-90. The MIDI device that
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the
corresponding Program Number.
Sound
Generator
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Soft Tru On
(2)
Each note played is sounded twice
Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
connected.
fig.09-
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.
Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127) and the LSB
(Controller 32, with a value of 0–127).
Sound is emitted
Sound Generator
Local On
* Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages.
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB
part.
● If you want to know more about how sounds are changed upon
reception of Program Change messages, please see “MIDI
Implementation” (Sold seperately).
1 5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith
MIDI En se m b le
Co n n e cte d MIDI De vice s
Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments (MIDI
Ensemble)
You can have connected MIDI devices played by the tempo
produced by the KF-90; you can also have the tempo
produced by connected MIDI devices play the KF-90. This
setting is called the “MIDI Sync.”
You can connect an electronic percussion device or other
such MIDI instrument to the KF-90’s MIDI In connector to
allow ensemble playing. Making the MIDI settings for the
instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The
sounds from the connected MIDI instrument are played from
the KF-90’s speaker.
Having connected MIDI devices work at the same tempo,
and start and stop at the same timing is called
“synchronization.”
1 . Press the [Function] button.
1 . Press the [Function] button.
The Function screen appears.
The Function screen appears.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
2 . Touch <System Setting>.
3 . Touch <MIDI Sync Mode>.
3 . Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.
The following screen is appeared.
fig.09-04.eps
The following screen is appeared.
fig.09-04.eps
4 . Touch
to make the setting.
4 . Select the method for using the MIDI In
connector.
Displayed
Description
Displayed
Meaning
Int
Adjustment of the KF-90’s tempo and starting
and stopping of playback and recording is
performed by the KF-90.
Normal
Normal setting. Make changes in tone and
other settings from the connected device.
Pad
Choose this when a percussion pad (such as
the Roland SPD-20 Total Percussion Pad) is
connected to the MIDI In connector on the KF-
90. You don’t need to make any MIDI settings
on the KF-90. Make the settings for the pad
sounds or others on the pad. (For more
Ext
The KF-90’s tempo as well as the starting and
stopping of playback and recording is
controlled by the MIDI device connected to the
KF-90’s MIDI In connector. When there is no
MIDI device connected, then tempo changing
operation can not be controlled by the KF-90.
Remote
Auto
Playback and recording of songs is controlled
by the connected MIDI device.
information, refer to the pad’s manual.)
Keyboard
Choose this when a keyboard (such as the
Roland PC-180 or AX-1 MIDI Keyboard
Controller) is connected to the MIDI In
connector on the KF-90. You can choose the
tones played with the connected keyboard on
the KF-90.
The KF-90’s tempo as well as the starting and
stopping of playback and recording is
controlled by the MIDI device connected to the
KF-90’s MIDI In connector. When there is no
MIDI device connected, then these operations
can be performed by the KF-90.
5 . When “Keyboard” is selected in Step 3 above, use
or to select the tone.
* Unless the above is set to either “Int” or “Auto,” the KF-90’s
buttons cannot be used to adjust the KF-90’s tempo.
Ordinarily, you should set this to “Int.”
The connected keyboard plays using the selected tone.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
1 5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
2 . Turn off the power to the KF-90 and other
Co n n e ctin g to Au d io
Eq u ip m e n t
connected equipment.
3 . Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
When you connect the KF-90 to audio equipment, you can
play the sounds from the KF-90 through the speakers on the
audio equipment or record your performances on a tape
recorder or other recording device.
connection.
4 . Switch on the KF-90.
5 . Switch on the connected device.
When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard
phone plug (sold separately).
6 . Adjust the volume level on the KF-90 and the
connected device.
● Co n n e cto rs
fig.09-
Recording KF-90 Performances on a Recording Device
7 . Start recording with the connected device.
8 . Play the keyboard.
9 . When the performance ends, stop recording on
O u tp u t Ja ck s
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
the connected equipment.
separately) and play the sounds from the KF-90 through the
speakers on the connected equipment or record your
performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
Pla y in g Au d io Eq u ip m e n t So u n d s
Th ro u g h th e Sp e a k e rs o n th e KF-9 0
fig.09-
Output L/R
(Line In, AUX IN)
In p u t Ja ck s
You can connect another sound source, such as audio
equipment or an electronic instrument using audio cables
(sold separately) and play the sounds from the connected
device through the speakers on the KF-90.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-90
● Ma k in g th e Co n n e ctio n s
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
and on the device you’re about to connect.
2 . Turn off the power to the KF-90 and other
connected equipment.
Pla y in g So u n d s fro m th e KF-9 0 Th ro u g h th e
Sp e a k e rs o n Au d io Eq u ip m e n t o r Re co rd in g
3 . Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce s o n a Re co rd in g De vice
connection.
fig.09-
4 . Turn on the connected equipment.
Input L/R
(Line In, AUX IN)
5 . Turn on the KF-90.
6 . Adjust the volume level on the KF-90 and the
connected device.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-90
and on the device you’re about to connect.
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-90
2 . Turn off the connected equipment.
and on the device you’re about to connect.
3 . Turn off the KF-90.
1 6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
7 . You should also make the settings for the MIDI
Co n n e ctin g a Co m p u te r
You can connect a computer on which a sequencing program
such as Roland Visual MT is installed and play sounds from
the software sound generator through the KF-90’s speakers
or save songs recorded on the KF-90 on the computer.
Co n n e ctio n Ex a m p le s:
● Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the KF-90 to the modem port (or
printer port) on the Apple Macintosh. Set the Computer
switch to “Mac.”
● Co n n e cto rs
fig.09-
When using the Macintosh “Patch Bay” utility, specify 1
MHz as the Interface Type (MIDI Interface Clock).
fig.09-
Apple Macintosh
Co m p u te r Co n n e cto r
You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange
Modem Port
performance data.
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to make the
connection.
Macintosh IIci
The type of cable required will depend on your computer.
Co m p u te r Sw itch
The setting for this switch is made depending on the
Computer cable (sold separately)
RSC-15APL
computer connected— Mac/ PC-1/ PC-2.
When this switch is set to MIDI, this connector cannot be
used.
● Connection with an IBM PC
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the KF-90 to the COM1 or COM2
● Ma k in g th e Co n n e ctio n s
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
serial port on the IBM PC. Set the Computer switch to “PC-2.”
fig.09-
IBM PC/AT
RS-232C
1 . Turn on the KF-90 and the computer.
2 . Using a compatible computer cable (sold
separately), connect the Computer connector on
the back of the keyboard with the computer’s
serial port.
Computer cable (sold separately)
RSC-15AT
3 . Set the computer switch on the underside of the
keyboard to match the type of computer
connected.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
* Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the
power to the unit is off.
4 . Turn on the computer.
5 . Turn on the KF-90.
6 . Make the settings for baud rate (transmission
speed) for the computer and the software.
For more information on this procedure, please refer to
the owner’s manual for your computer.
1 6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Tro u b le Sh o o tin g
If you think there’s a problem, read this first.
●Have you pressed the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button?
Th e p o w e r d o e sn ’t co m e o n .
●Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctly?
If the One Touch Program [Arranger] button has not been
Th e b u tto n d o e sn ’t w o rk .
Turn the power off, then back on.
Ce rta in in stru m e n ts a re n o t h e a rd w h ile
p la y in g a so n g .
●Is the track button set so as to mute the sound (black
background)?
N o so u n d is h e a rd .
●Has the [Volume] knob been moved all the way to the left?
Sounds on a track for which the track button is muted
(indicated by a black background) are not played. Touch
the button to enable play of the sounds (white background)
●Has the [Balance] knob been moved all the way to the
●Has the volume been set to “0” using the Part Balance
A To n e o r Mu sic Sty le ca n n o t b e se le cte d .
N o so u n d is h e a rd (w h e n a MIDI in stru m e n t is
co n n e cte d ).
●Is the Computer switch on the rear of the KF-90 set to
Th e re is a slig h t d e la y b e fo re p la y b a ck o f a
so n g o n flo p p y d isk sta rts.
●There are two types of SMF music data: format 0 and
format 1. If the song uses SMF format 1 data, there will be a
slight delay until playback starts. Refer to the booklet that
came with the music data you’re using to determine the
format type.
N o so u n d is h e a rd w h e n th e k e y b o a rd is
p la y e d .
So u n d s a re h e a rd tw ice (d o u b le d ) w h e n th e
k e y b o a rd is p la y e d .
W h e n so n g p la y b a ck sta rts, th e o n -scre e n
m e a su re n u m b e r re a d s “ PU” (p ick u p ).
●If the song starts in the middle of a measure, the display
shows “PU” (pickup) at the beginning of the song. After
that, the measure number is displayed.
●When the KF-90 is connected to an external sequencer, set
it to the Local OFF mode. Alternatively, the sequencer
could be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF
Th e Fw d [
w o rk .
] a n d Bw d [
] b u tto n s d o n ’t
N o t a ll p la y e d n o te s a re so u n d e d .
●The maximum number of notes that the KF-90 can play
simultaneously is 64 (stereo). Frequent use of the damper
pedal during automatic accompaniment or when playing
along with a song on floppy disk may result in
performance data with too many notes, causing some notes
to drop out.
●The fast-forward and reverse buttons are ignored while
music data is being read in. Wait until processing finishes.
Pre ssin g th e Re se t [
] b u tto n d o e sn ’t re tu rn
to th e b e g in n in g o f th e so n g .
●Some music data may contain settings that stop play at a
point partway through the song. When playing such songs,
pressing the Reset [
] button moves the song to the
Th e tu n in g o r p itch o f th e k e y b o a rd o r so n g is
o ff.
●Are the settings for the Temperament and tuning curve
point that has been set. Press the button several times more
to return to the beginning of the tune.
Th e To n e h a s ch a n g e d .
●During automatic accompaniment, changing the Music
Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the
upper part of the keyboard to match the new Music Style.
If you want to change only the Music Style without also
●When a performance made along with a Music Data tune
has been recorded, recording the performance to track
button [1/ Whole] may make the Tones for buttons [3/ Left]
and [4/ Right] change as well.
Effe cts ca n n o t b e a p p lie d to To n e s.
●It’s not possible to apply more than one effect at the same
time, so when a performance has been recorded on
multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as it’s
played back, the desired effect may not be applied.
Au to m a tic a cco m p a n im e n t is n o t h e a rd .
●Has the [Balance] knob been moved all the way to the
1 6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le Sh o o tin g
Ch o rd In te llig e n ce ca n ’t b e u se d .
De p re ssin g a p e d a l h a s n o e ffe ct, o r th e p e d a l
e ffe ct d o e sn ’t sto p .
●Has a different function been assigned to the pedal? See
A n o te d o e sn ’t sto p p la y in g
●Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been changed
●Normal pedal operation is automatically enabled when the
One Touch Program [Piano] button is pressed.
●Unplugging a pedal cord from the unit while the power is
on may cause the pedal’s effect to be applied without
stopping. Be sure to switch off the power to the unit before
attempting to disconnect or connect a pedal cord.
Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may be sounded
continuously.
Re co rd in g is n o t p o ssib le .
●Has one of the track buttons for recording been selected?
A Hig h -Pitch e d W h in e Is Pro d u ce d
●When listening through headphones:
To go back to the usual recording method.
Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano tones
feature an ample high-end component, which may make
the sound appear to have metallic reverberation added.
Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible
when supplemented by heavy reverb, you may be able to
diminish the problem by reducing the amount of reverb
applied to the sound.
Th e re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce h a s d isa p p e a re d .
●Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when
the power to the KF-90 is turned off or a song is selected.
A performance cannot be restored once it’s been deleted,
so be sure to save it on a floppy disk before you turn off the
When listening through speakers:
Th e te m p o o f th e re co rd e d so n g o r m e tro n o m e
is n o t rig h t.
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the
KF-90) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
●When you record after selecting an internal song that
features a changing tempo, the tempos on the other tracks
are changed in keeping with these tempo changes. In
addition, the metronome tempo is also changed the same
way.
Th e Ba ss Ra n g e So u n d s O d d , o r Th e re Is a
Vib ra tin g Re so n a n ce
●When listening through speakers:
Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the
KF-90 to resonate. Resonation can also occur with
fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In
particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass
component is increased, and when the sound is played at
higher volumes. Use the following measures to suppress
such resonance.
N o th in g a p p e a rs o n scre e n .
●The KF-90 uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be
displayed when the ambient temperature is below
freezing.
Ly rics a re n o t in d ica te d p ro p e rly in th e
d isp la y .
•
Place speakers so they are 10–15 cm from walls and other
surfaces.
●With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed
correctly.
•
•
Reduce the volume.
●Lyrics data can not be saved on a floppy disk.
●If you press a button while the lyrics are being shown in
the display, the lyrics will disappear. To recall them, press
Move the speakers away from any resonating objects.
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the
KF-90) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
the Play [
] button.
Sco re is n o t in d ica te d p ro p e rly in th e d isp la y .
●In the Score screen, some lyrics or notes could extend
beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
●The score display feature is particularly unsuitable for the
display of difficult, complex musical works that demand
accurate notation.
Re ve rb e ra tio n Still Au d ib le Eve n w ith Re ve rb
Tu rn e d O ff
●Since the KF-90’s piano sounds faithfully reproduce the
sense of spaciousness and reverberation of an actual
acoustic piano’s sound, a certain amount of reverberation
is still perceptible, even with the reverb effect deactivated.
●If you select a part that does not contain performance data,
notes will not be displayed in the score.
Th e vo lu m e le ve l o f th e in stru m e n t co n n e cte d
to KF-9 0 is to o lo w .
Th e To u ch Scre e n d o e sn ’t re sp o n d co rre ctly .
●The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced
if some time has passed since it was last used. Take a look
positioning.
●Could you be using a connection cable that contains a
resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
1 6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If th is Me ssa g e Ap p e a rs o n Scre e n
In d ica tio n : PU
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 2
Meaning:
When a song with a pickup (a song that does
Meaning:
The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive
not start on the first beat) is played back, the
measure numbers will be indicated in the
display as PU, 1, 2, and so forth.
can’t be read. Be sure you’re using Roland
SMF Music Files or other music files
floppy disk, you need to format the floppy
In d ica tio n : Erro r.0 0
Meaning:
To protect the copyright, this music file
cannot be saved as an SMF. Also, the music
file can not be saved. If you want to save it,
please save on the same floppy disk.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 3
Meaning:
The floppy disk was removed from the disk
drive while reading or writing was in
progress. Insert the floppy disk and repeat
the procedure.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.0 1
Meaning:
You can only read the music file or music
style. It can not be saved on a floppy disk or
internal memory.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 4
Meaning:
This floppy disk is damaged and cannot be
In d ica tio n : Erro r.0 2
used. Insert a different disk and repeat the
procedure.
Meaning:
The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the
Protect position. Change it to the Write
position. Repeat the procedure.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 5
Meaning:
This song or music style cannot be read. Also,
In d ica tio n : Erro r.0 3
you can only use User Programs that have
Meaning:
This floppy disk cannot store the format or
save any data. Insert a different disk and
repeat the procedure.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 6
Meaning:
The KF-90 cannot read the floppy disk
quickly enough. Press the Stop [ ] button,
then press the Reset [ ] button and Play
] button to play the song.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.0 4
Meaning:
The data cannot be saved onto this floppy
disk because the format is different. Use the
floppy disk in the same format.
[
In d ica tio n : Erro r.3 0
In d ica tio n : Erro r.0 5
Meaning:
The internal memory capacity of the KF-90 is
full. Save the song or music style data on a
floppy disk to delete the song data or the
User style stored on the KF-90 memory.
Meaning:
A new song cannot be written on this song.
Select a different song number or use a
different floppy disk, and repeat the
procedure.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.4 0
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 0
Meaning:
The KF-90 cannot deal with the excessive
Meaning:
No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive.
MIDI data sent from the external MIDI
device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent
to the KF-90.
Insert the disk correctly, and repeat the
procedure.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.1 1
Meaning:
There is not sufficient space left on the floppy
disk or internal memory for the data to be
saved. Save the data onto a different floppy
disk.
1 6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If th is Me ssa g e Ap p e a rs o n Scre e n
In d ica tio n : Erro r.4 1
Meaning:
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been
disconnected. Connect it properly and
securely.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.4 2
Meaning:
An excessive amount of performance data
has been sent to KF-90 in one time and
therefore could not be recorded. Change the
tempo more slowly to record the
performance again.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.4 3
Meaning:
The Computer Switch is set to a wrong
position or the computer is set wrongly.
Switch off the KF-90 then set the Computer
Switch to the correct position and set the
computer correctly. After that, switch on the
KF-90 again.
In d ica tio n : Erro r.5 1
Meaning:
There is something wrong with the system.
Repeat the procedure from the beginning.
* If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the
Roland service center.
1 6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To n e List
St.FM EP
[Pia n o ] Gro u p
[Gu ita r/ Ba ss] Gro u p
Hard FM EP
Balafon
Grand Piano1
Ballad Piano
Bright Piano
Piano Choir
PianoStrings
Air Grand
EX Ac.Guitar
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
Jazz Guitar
JC E.Guitar
DistortionGt
Gut Guitar
12str Guitar
Overdrive Gt
Fingered Bs.
Picked Bs.
Santur
Steel Drums
Detuned EP 1
Detuned EP 2
Hard Rhodes
SynRingClav.
Reso Clav.
Phase Clav.
Tubular-bell
Kalimba
Rock Piano
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk 2
Harpsi.Singl
Harpsi.Doubl
Harpsichord
Grand Piano2
Bell Piano
Fretless Bs.
Rock Rhythm
Rock Rhythm2
Muted Dis.Gt
Acoustic Bs.
A.Bass+Cymbl
Mute PickBs.
Power Guitar
Power Gt.2
Open Hard
Mandolin
Celesta
Analog Clav.
Piano Oohs
Synth Harpsi
Harpsi.o
[O rg a n ] Gro u p
Rock Organ1
Rock Organ2
Jazz Organ 1
Rotary Org.S
Rotary Org.F
L-Organ
Coupled Hps.
UprightPiano
MIDI Piano1
MIDI Piano2
Piano 1
Piano 2
Hawaiian Gt.
Shamisen
Full Organ 1
Full Organ 2
Full Organ 3
Jazz Organ2
Jazz Organ3
Jazz Organ4
Nason flt 8'
Diapason 8'
Organ Flute
Accordion
Piano 3
Feedback Gt.
Feedback Gt2
Dazed Guitar
Ukulele
[E.Pia n o ] Gro u p
Stage Rhodes
Dyno Rhodes
Suitcase
Banjo
Koto
Nylon+Steel
Nylon Gt.o
Steel Vox
E.Piano 1
E.Piano 2
E.Piano 3
Hard Accord
Harmonica
Lower Organ1
Lower Organ2
Full Organ 4
Pop Organ
Jungle Bass
Modular Bass
WireStr Bass
Muted Gt.
Wurly
EG+Rhodes 1
EG+Rhodes 2
Vibraphone
Marimba
Muted Gt.2
Mellow Gt.
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Mr.Smooth
5th Dist.
Soft Marimba
Clav.
VS Organ
CheeseOrgan
Organ Bass
Pipe Org. Bs
Metalic Org.
Trem.Flute
Church Organ
Theater Org.
Organ 1
Hard Clav.
Soft Clav.
Glockenspiel
Xylophone
Vibra Bells
Soft E.Piano
60's E.Piano
Hard E.Piano
Pop Vibe.
Gt.Harmonics
Slap Bass
ResoSH Bass
SH101 Bass
SynthBass101
Organ 2
Digi Church
Pop Celesta
Music Box
FM+SA EP
1 6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To n e List
Bottle Blow
BottleBlow2
GS Eng.Horn
Alto Sax
[Sy n th ] Gro u p
[Strin g s] Gro u p
JP SuperSaw
LM PureLead
SquareWave2
Holy Voices
New Age Pad
Sugar Key
Natural Lead
2600 SubOsc
Acid Guitar
Org Bells
Strings
Slow Strings
Velo Strings
Violin
Tenor Sax
GS Bari Sax
Bassoon
Cello
Harp
Piccolo
Tremolo Str
Suspense Str
SlowStrings2
EX Orchestra
Slow Violin
Contrabass
Choir Str
Recorder
GS Pan Flute
Shakuhachi
Ocarina
Clear Bells
Fantasia
Blow Pipe
LM Square
Warm SquPad
HollowReleas
Soft Crystal
Crystal
[Bra ss] Gro u p
Harp Strings
Bell Strings
PizzicatoStr
Mellow Pizz.
Timpani
Power Brass
Bright Brass
BrassSection
EX Trumpet
Brass ff
Fantasia 2
FM Lead 1
FM Lead 2
Mg Lead
Strings 2
Legato Str
Warm Strings
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Slow Str
Orchestra
OrchestraHit
Oct Strings
Warm JP Str
JP Saw Str
OB Strings
Euro Hit
SuperF.Horns
Trombone
Flugel Horn
Fr.Horn Solo
Trumpet
Harpvox
CC Solo
Brightness
Dual Sqr&Saw
P5 Saw Lead
Rhythmic Saw
Waspy Synth
JP8 Pulse
MutedTrumpet
Tuba
Tp Shake
EX Tp&Shake
St. Brass ff
TromboneSoft
Trombone2
OrchestraBrs
Brass 1
Cheese Saw
Syn.Square
JP8 Square
Warm Pad
Digi Bells
Philly Hit
6th Hit
Bass Hit
Brass 2
Nylon Harp
Nylon+Rhodes
Soft Pad
Soft Brass
DeepSynBrass
Oct SynBrass
Jump Brass
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
French Horn
GS Tuba
[Sa x ] Gro u p
P5 Poly
EX Alto Sax
AltoSax Soft
Tenor Sax f
Flute
Reso Saw
RAVE Vox
Fat & Perky
Heaven II
Oboe
JP8 Sqr Pad
Sweep Pad 2
Converge
Pan Flute
Soprano Sax
Blow Sax
Big Panner
Ai-yai-a
Sax Section
English Horn
Clarinet
Echo Pan 2
Falling Down
Poly King
Bs Clarinet
Baritone Sax
AltoSax + Tp
Grow Sax
Octave Stack
Vox Sweep
Rising Osc
1 6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To n e List
Detuned Or.1
Detuned Or.2
Church Org.1
Church Org.2
Church Org.3
Full Organ 4
Jazz Organ 1
Rock Organ2
Reed Organ
Accordion Fr
Accordion It
GS Harmonica
Bandoneon
GS Nylon Gt.
Nylon Guitar
Nylon Gt.o
Ukulele
Orchestra
GS Sl.Str
Warm Pad
Polysynth
Space Voice
Bowed Glass
Metal Pad
Halo Pad
Sweep Pad
Ice Rain
[Vo ice / GS]
Gro u p
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Strings3
Choir Aahs
Choir
Jazz Scat
Dreamy Choir
Humming
Rich Choir
Doos Voice
Choir Oohs
Pop Voice
SynVox
Pop Voice
SynVox
Soundtrack
Crystal
OrchestraHit
GS Trumpet
GS Trombone
Trombone 2
GS Tuba
Syn Mallet
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
Thum Voice
Doot Accent
Dat Accent
Bop Accent
Choir
MutedTrumpet
French Horn
Fr.Horn 2
Brass 1
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
Star Theme
Sitar
Choir Aahs
Steel-str.Gt
12-str.Gt
Piano 1
Brass 2
Piano 1w
GS Mandolin
Jazz Guitar
GS Hawaiian
Clean Gt.
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
Synth Brass3
Synth Brass4
AnalogBrass1
AnalogBrass2
GS Sop.Sax
Alto Sax
Sitar 2
Piano 1d
Banjo
Piano 2
GS Shamisen
Koto
Piano 2w
Piano 3
Chorus Gt.
Muted Gt.
Taisho Koto
Kalimba
Piano 3w
GS Honkytonk
Honky-tonk 2
GS E.Piano1
GS E.Piano2
60's E.Piano
E.Piano 1v
E.Piano 2v
Detuned EP 1
Detuned EP 2
GS Harpsi.
Coupled Hps.
Harpsi.w
Funk Gt.
Bagpipe
Funk Gt.2
Fiddle
Overdrive Gt
GS Dist.Gt
Tenor Sax
GS Bari Sax
GS Oboe
Shanai
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
Feedback Gt.
Gt.Harmonics
Gt. Feedback
GS Ac.Bass
GS Fing.Bass
GS Picked Bs
Fretless Bs.
Slap Bass
GS Eng.Horn
Bassoon
Steel Drums
Woodblock
Castanets
Taiko
Clarinet
Piccolo
GS Flute
Concert BD
Melo. Tom 1
Melo. Tom 2
Synth Drum
808 Tom
Recorder
GS Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Harpsi.o
Slap Bass 2
SynthBass101
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Synth Bass 3
Synth Bass 4
Rubber Bass
GS Violin
Soft Clav.
Celesta
Elec Perc.
Reverse Cym.
Gt.FretNoise
Gt.Cut Noise
String Slap
Breath Noise
Fl.Key Click
Seashore
Rain
GS Glocken
GS Music Box
GS Vibe
Ocarina
Square Wave
Square
Vibe.w
Sine Wave
Saw Wave
Saw
GS Marimba
Marimba
Slow Violin
Viola
Xylophone
Tubular-bell
Church Bell
Carillon
Doctor Solo
Syn.Calliope
Chiffer Lead
Charang
GS Cello
Contrabass
GS Trem.Str
PizzicatoStr
GS Harp
Thunder
Wind
GS Santur
Organ 1
Solo Vox
Stream
5th Saw Wave
Bass & Lead
Fantasia
Bubble
Organ 2
Timpani
Bird
Pop Organ 1
GS Strings
Dog
1 6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To n e List
Horse-Gallop
Bird 2
Steel-strGt*
Jazz Guitar*
Clean Gt.*
Muted Gt.*
Funk Gt.*
OverdriveGt*
Dist.Guitar*
Gt.Harmo*
Acoustic Bs*
Fingered Bs*
Picked Bs.*
Fretless Bs*
Slap Bass 1*
Slap Bass 2*
Synth Bass1*
Synth Bass2*
Rubber Bass*
Violin*
Bottle Blow*
Shakuhachi*
Whistle*
* Tone with a “*” symbol
appended to their name
may not play back
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
DoorCreaking
Door
satisfactorily on other GS
sound generating devices.
Ocarina*
Square Wave*
Saw Wave*
Doctor Solo*
SynCalliope*
ChifferLead*
Charang*
Scratch
Windchime
Helicopter
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Solo Vox*
5th SawWave*
Bass & Lead*
Fantasia*
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Warm Pad*
Polysynth*
Space Voice*
Bowed Glass*
Metal Pad*
Halo Pad*
Sweep Pad*
Ice Rain*
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
Applause
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Viola*
Cello*
Contrabass*
Tremolo Str*
Pizzicato*
Harp*
Heart Beat
Footsteps
Gun Shot
Soundtrack*
Crystal*
Timpani*
Syn Mallet*
Atmosphere*
Brightness*
Goblin*
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Strings*
SlowStrings*
Syn.Str 1*
Syn.Str 2*
Choir Aahs*
Pop Voice*
SynVox*
Explosion
Piano 1*
Echo Drops*
Star Theme*
Sitar*
Piano 2*
Piano 3*
Honky-tonk*
E.Piano 1*
E.Piano 2*
Harpsichord*
Clav.*
Banjo*
Orche.Hit*
Trumpet*
Trombone*
Tuba*
Shamisen*
Koto*
Kalimba*
Bagpipe*
Celesta*
M.Trumpet*
FrenchHorns*
Brass 1*
Fiddle*
Glocken*
Music Box*
Vibraphone*
Marimba*
Xylophone*
Tubularbell*
Santur*
Shanai*
Tinkle Bell*
Agogo*
SynthBrass1*
SynthBrass2*
A.Brass 1*
Soprano Sax*
Alto Sax*
Steel Drums*
Woodblock*
Taiko*
Melo.Tom 1*
Synth Drum*
ReverseCym.*
Fret Noise*
BreathNoise*
Seashore*
Organ 1*
Tenor Sax*
BaritoneSax*
Oboe*
Organ 2*
Pop Organ 1*
Rock Organ2*
ChurchOrg.1*
Reed Organ*
AccordionFr*
Harmonica*
Bandoneon*
Nylon-strGt*
EnglishHorn*
Bassoon*
Clarinet*
Bird*
Piccolo*
Telephone 1*
Helicopter*
Applause*
Gun Shot*
Flute*
Recorder*
Pan Flute*
1 6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m / SFX Se t List
* -----: No sound.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
POP
ROCK
JAZZ BRUSH
VOX DRUM
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
Rock Snare
Rock Snare
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Vox Dut
22
Rock Snare
Rock Snare
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Kick
Pop Kick
Pop Side Stick
Pop Sanre s
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare s
Pop Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Pop Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Pop Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Rock Kick
Rock Kick
Rock Side Stick
Rock Sanre s
Rock Snare Ghost
Rock Snare s
Rock Low Tom f
Rock CHH 1
Rock Low Tom
Rock CHH 2
Rock Mid Tom f
Rock OHH
Rock Mid Tom
Rock High Tom f
Rock Crash Cymbal
Rock High Tom
Rock Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha Cowbell
Chinees Cymbal
Vibra-slap 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 3
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Kick
Pop Kick
Jazz Snare Swing
Jazz Sanre
Pop Snare Swing
Jazz Sanre
Jazz Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Jazz Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Jazz Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Jazz Mid Tom
Jazz High Tom f
Jazz Crash Cymbal 1
Jazz High Tom
Jazz Ride Cymbal 1
Jazz Chinees Cymbal
Jazz Ride Cymbal 2
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha Cowbell
Jazz Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
25
27
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Vox Dom
Vox Tuush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu!
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
C2
37
39
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Pop Mid Tom
Pop High Tom f
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
C3 48
50
49
51
Pop Crash Cymbal 1
Pop High Tom
Pop Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha Cowbell
Pop Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
Vox Thu
52
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
53
54
56
58
55
57
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
Vox Afahhhh
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
65
66
68
70
67
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
69
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
1 7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m / SFX Se t List
POP
ROCK
JAZZ BRUSH
VOX DRUM
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
89
91
93
95
96
98
90
92
94
Shekere 2
Shekere 2
Shekere 2
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
C7
97
99
-----
-----
-----
-----
100
101
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
102
104
103
105
1 7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m / SFX Se t List
STANDARD*
ROOM*
POWER
ELECTRONIC
21
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
23
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2’
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick1
Room Kick
Side Stick
Room Snr 1
Hand Clap
Std Snr 1
Room Low Tom 2’
Closed Hi-hat 1’
Room Low Tom 1’
Pedal Hi-hat 1’
Room Mid Tom 2’
Open Hi-hat 1’
Room Mid Tom 1’
Room Hi Tom 2’
Crash Cymbal 1
Room Hi Tom 1’
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
MONDO Kick
Side Stick
Gated SD
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
24
25
27
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Kick 1
Side Stick
Std Snr 1
Hand Clap
Elec BD
Side Stick
Elec SD
Hand Clap
C2
37
39
Hand Clap
Std Snr 2
Snare Drum 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 1
Room Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Gated SD
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1’
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1’
Mid Tom 2
Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Elec Mid Tom 1
Elec Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Open Hi-hat 1’
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
1 7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m / SFX Se t List
JAZZ
GS STANDARD
TR-808
DANCE
BRUSH
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick 2
25
27
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
808 Bass Drum 1
808 Rim Shot
808 Snare Drum
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
808 Low Tom 2
808 CHH
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Dance Snr 1
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick 1
808 Bass Drum 2
808 Rim Shot
TR-909 Snr
Hand Clap
Dance Snr 2
808 Low Tom 2
808 CHH
808 Low Tom 1
808 CHH
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
Std Kick 1
Side Stick
Snare Drum 1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Kick 1
Side Stick
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
C2
37
39
Brush Swirl
Brush Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 2
Brush Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Brush Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 2
Brush Mid Tom 1
Brush Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Brush Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
808 Low Tom 1
808 CHH
808 Mid Tom 2
808 OHH [EXC1]
808 Mid Tom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cymbal
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
808 High Conga
808 Mid Conga
808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
808 Mid Tom 2
808 OHH
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
808 Mid Tom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cymbal
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
808 High Conga
808 Mid Conga
808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
1 7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m / SFX Se t List
● SFX
ORCHESTRA
GS ROOM
GS BRUSH
SOUND EFFECTS
21
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
22
23
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High Q
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
24
25
27
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
Finger Snap
Close Hi-hat
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
Side Stick
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
Std Kick 1
Side Stick
Brush Tap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Std Kick 1
Side Stick
Snare Drum 1
Hand Clap
C2
37
39
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Slap
Snare Drum 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 1
Room Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
Guitar cutting noise (up)
Guitar cutting noise (down)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
C3 48
50
49
51
52
Timpani f
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Concert Cymbal 1
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
55
57
59
C4 60
62
Scratch
61
63
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
64
65
66
68
70
67
Train
69
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Bubble
Cat
-----
-----
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
-----
1 7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mu sic Sty le List
[Po p ]
[Ro ck ]
[Aco u stic]
Pop Jazz
Michael'sPop
Groovin
70's 1
Light Rock
Fast Rock
Power Pop
JB Soul
Piano Jazz
Piano Night
Piano Pop
Gtr.Fast Pop
GuitarBallad
Cntry Pickin
70's 2
Lets Twist
Cntry Rockin
Latin Pop
House Pop
Euro Dance
Fusion
Easy Rock
Shuffle Rock
80's Rock
PianoRagtime
Piano Slow
Piano Latin
Camp Fire
Medium Pop
Funk Pop
BigBand Pop
60's R&B
Guitar Bossa
Guitar Waltz
Contemporary
50's R&B
8Beat Pop 1
8Beat Pop 2
16Beat Pop 1
Cool Al
Rock 1
PianoShuffle
Piano Ballad
Piano Waltz
Pf Concerto
PianoBoogie
Rock 2
16Beat Rock
Rock n Roll
AcousticRck1
AcousticRck2
Light Pop
West Coast
[Ja zz]
Surf'fun
[Ba lla d ]
Scat Swing
Slow Swing
On The Town
Jazz Waltz
The Blues
50's Pop 1
Soulful Sax
Swing Ballad
Pop Ballad
50's Pop 2
Beach Sound
Mersey Beat
Acoustic Pop
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
8BeatBallad3
Big Band
MorningLight
Swing Pop
A Cappella
Organ Swing
Jazz Band
MediumBallad
70's Ballad
Light Fusion
Power 8Beat
70's 8beat
Big Serenade
Fast Waltz
Big Band 2
12/ 8 Ballad
6/ 8 SlowRock
6/ 8 Ballad
Torch Song
Dreamin'
Slow Dance
Crystal
1 7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mu sic Sty le List
[La tin ]
[Tra d itio n a l]
Da ta Disk Sty le
Mambo
Foxtrot 2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Ocean Side
16Beat Pop
70's Disco
Latin
Dixieland
Charleston
Slow Waltz
Slow Waltz 2
Musette
Plena
Bossa Nova 1
Bossa Nova 2
Bossa Nova 3
Pop'n Roll
16BeatBallad
60's Ballad
Swayin'
Merengue
Bomba
Parade
Contemporary *
Club Piano
G.Pop
Tango
Salsa
Last Dance
Vienna Waltz
ClasiclPolka
Polka
Fast Bossa
Slow Beguine
Slow Bossa
Twist
Shuffle
PianoBoogie2
CountryRoads
CtrySerenade
CountryPiano
Easy Country
Hoedown
Rhumba
Samba
March
Foxtrot
Chacha
[W o rld ]
Cajun
Mariachi
CountryBlues
BigBandSwing
BigBndBallad
Island
German Rock
Gospel Shout
ClassicCntry
Country Song
Slow Swing
Blues
*
Combo
Ireland
Mambo
*
*
Scotland 6/ 8
Paris Waltz
Tejano
Merengue
Calypso
NewBossaNova
Broadway
Jazz Waltz
March
Gospel Pop
Hawaiian
*
*
Scotland
Habanera
Sevilla
C&W Ballad
Western
Enka 1
Gospel Piano
Bluegrass
Enka 2
Rock'n Cntry
* A Music Style indicated by “*” has the
same name as a built-in Music Style,
but its contents are different.
Country Folk
Country Rock
CountryWaltz
Festival
1 7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rh y th m Pa tte rn List
Prythm Pattern
8 Beat 1
(Measure)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
8 Beat 2
8 Beat 3
8 Beat 4
16Beat 1
16Beat 2
Rock 1
Rock 2
House 1
House 2
Shuffle1
Shuffle2
Brush
Swing 1
Swing 2
Waltz
March 1
March 2
BossaNova
Samba 1
Samba 2
Rhumba
Mambo
Tango
Beguine
Simple4/ 4
Simple3/ 4
Simple6/ 8
CountIn 1
CountIn 2
C.InSwing
Fill In1
Fill In2
Fill In3
Ending 1
Ending 2
Ending 3
Stick 4/ 4
Stick 3/ 4
Stick 6/ 8
1 7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch o rd List
● symbol : Indicates the constituent note of chords.
● symbol : Chord shown with an “●”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “●” (p. 68).
C
C#
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
CM7
C7
C#M7
C#7
DM7
D7
M7
7
EM7
E7
FM7
F7
Cm
Cm7
Cdim
C#m
C#m7
C#dim
Dm
Dm7
Ddim
m
Em
Em7
Edim
Fm
Fm7
Fdim
m7
dim
Cm7 ( 5 )
C#m7 ( 5 )
C#aug
Dm7 ( 5 )
E
E
E
E
E
E
m7 ( 5 )
Em7 ( 5 )
Fm7 ( 5 )
Caug
Daug
aug
Eaug
Faug
Csus4
C7sus4
C6
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#6
Dsus4
D7sus4
D6
sus4
7sus4
6
Esus4
E7sus4
E6
Fsus4
F7sus4
F6
Cm6
C#m6
Dm6
m6
Em6
Fm6
1 7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch o rd List
F#
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#M7
F#7
GM7
G7
M7
AM7
A7
M7
BM7
B7
7
7
F#m
Gm
m
Am
m
Bm
F#m7
F#dim
F#m7 ( 5 )
F#aug
F#sus4
Gm7
Gdim
Gm7 ( 5 )
Gaug
Gsus4
m7
Am7
Adim
Am7 ( 5 )
Aaug
Asus4
m7
Bm7
Bdim
Bm7 ( 5 )
Baug
Bsus4
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
F#7sus4
F#6
G7sus4
G6
A
A
7sus4
A7sus4
A6
B
B
7sus4
B7sus4
B6
6
6
F#m6
Gm6
A
m6
Am6
B
m6
Bm6
1 7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effe cts List
Display
Description
Chorus
Makes sounds broader and fatter.
A stereo chorus.
Stereo Chorus
Hexa Chorus
A multilayer chorus.
Tremolo Chorus
Space D
A chorus with a tremolo effect.
A clear chorus.
Rotary
Adds a rotary-speaker effect.
Stereo Delay
Delays the sound with a stereo effect.
Modulation Delay
Triple Tap Delay
Quadruple Tap Delay
Phaser
Adds a wavering effect to the delayed sound.
A three-way delay.
A four-way delay.
Adds undulations to the sound.
Stereo Flanger
Step Flanger
Adds metallic reverberations.
A flanger that varies the pitch in a stepwise fashion.
Adds modulation to the sound.
Enhancer
Overdrive
Applies soft distortion to the sound.
Distortion
Applies hard distortion to the sound.
Auto Wah
Changes the tone in a cyclical manner.
Compressor
Suppresses fluctuations in volume.
Gate Reverb
Cuts off the reverberations before they fade away completely.
Adds two pitch-shifted sounds to the original sound (two-voice pitch shifter).
The pitch will change in steps (feedback pitch shifter).
Applies both enhancer and chorus effects.
Applies both enhancer and flanger effects.
Applies both enhancer and delay effects.
2V Pitch Shifter
FB Pitch Shifter
Enhancer->Chorus
Enhancer->Flanger
Enhancer->Delay
Chorus->Delay
Flanger->Delay
Overdrive->Chorus
Overdrive->Flanger
Overdrive->Delay
Distortion->Chorus
Distortion->Flanger
Distortion->Delay
Sympathetic Resonance
Wave Chorus
2 Band Chorus
Space Chorus
Chorus->Flanger
Rhodes Multi
Clean Guitar Multi 1
Clean Guitar Multi 2
Tremolo
Applies both chorus and delay effects.
Applies both flanger and delay effects.
Applies both overdrive and chorus effects.
Applies both overdrive and flanger effects.
Applies both overdrive and delay effects.
Applies both distortion and chorus effects.
Applies both distortion and flanger effects.
Applies both distortion and delay effects.
Applies a resonance effect when the damper pedal is depressed.
Produces a chorus with strong undulations.
Applies different chorus effects in the treble and bass bands.
A chorus with extremely small undulations.
Applies both chorus and flanger effects.
The optimal effect for an electric piano.
Applies an effect that combines compressor, chorus, and delay.
Applies an effect that combines Auto Wah, Equalizer, chorus, and delay.
Produces cyclical changes in volume.
Auto Pan
Makes the sonic position of the sound move to the left or right.
This effect connect a chorus and a delay in parallel.
This effect connect a chorus and a flanger in parallel.
Applies an effect that combines rotary, Equalizer and Over Drive.
Chorus/Delay
Chorus/Flanger
Rotary Multi
Applies an effect that combines Ring Modulator, Equalizer, Pitch Shifter, Phaser, and
Delay.
Keyboard Multi
1 8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
De m o So n g List
No.
1
Title
Composer
Scott Wilkie
John Maul
Scott Wilkie
Copyright
© 2000 Scott Wilkie (ASCAP)
© 2000 John Maul
First Time Around
Jobs For The Boys
Howz It Feel?
2
© 2000 Scott Wilkie (ASCAP)
3
Masashi & Kazuko
Hirashita
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
4
5
Midnight Blue
Joyful Sunday
Masashi & Kazuko
Hirashita
* Use of the song data and music style data supplied with this product for any purpose other than private, personal
enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be
copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder.
* No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT.
Pro file
John Maul
John Maul is a musician, composer and arranger having graduated from the Royal Academy of Music in
London. John’s work encompasses studio recordings and live performances including work with top UK
Jazz artists.
His writing credits include commercial music for BBC radio and television, as well as scoring jazz and
classical works.
Having been a product specialist for Roland U.K., John is now actively involved in music software
composing/ programming for both Roland Japan and various music publishers. Quite recently his “Musical
Picture Book,” a volume of original piano music encompassing all standards of musical ability, which
included the piano and orchestral accompaniment data in SMF format, was published and printed.
Scott Wilkie
Scott Wilkie is a contemporary jazz recording artist, based in southern California. He has several recordings
available on NaradaJazz Records, and he tours frequently with his own band. He also appears worldwide as
an artist for Roland. You can find him on-line at www.scottwilkie.com.
Kazuko Hirashita, Masashi Hirashita
Masashi and Kazuko both started studying classical piano when they were in their infancy. Both went on to
study composition.
At the same time, they had started their own music careers as keyboardists and composers. Their work
covers a wide spectrum of styles and activities, including pop, fusion and jazz music as well as many
writing and producing jobs.
1 8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Da ta Disk So n g List
No.
Title
Composer
J. S. Bach
Copyright
Menuet in G Major, BWV. Anh. 114 from “Notebook Of
Anna Magdalena Bach”
© 1992 Roland Corporation
1
© 1997 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
2
3
Gymnopedie No. 1
E. Satie
Piano Sonata No. 15 in C Major, 1st Movement
W. A. Mozart
“Fröhlicher Landmann” from “Album Für Die Jugend”
Op. 68
© 1996 Roland Corporation
4
R. Schumann
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1994 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
5
6
7
8
9
Londonderry Air
Irish Folksong
T. Badarzewska
C. Gounod
S. Joplin
A Maiden's Prayer
Ave Maria
The Entertainer
Air from Ouvertüre No.3 BWV.1068
J. S. Bach
10 Etude No. 74 from “Beyer Piano Textbook”
11 Etude No. 78 from “Beyer Piano Textbook”
12 Etude No. 90 from “Beyer Piano Textbook”
F. Beyer
F. Beyer
F. Beyer
* Use of the song data and music style data supplied with this product for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted
work without the permission of the copyright holder.
1 8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mu sic File s Th a t th e KF-9 0 Ca n Use
W h a t Are Mu sic File s?
● Ab o u t th e KF-9 0 So u n d
Music files contain information describing the details of a
Ge n e ra to r
musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was
The KF-90 come equipped with GM 2/ GS sound generators.
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of
force.”By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the
KF-90, the performance information is sent from the floppy
disk to the piano, and played faithfully by the piano. This is
different than a CD, since the music file does not contain a
recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to erase
certain parts, or to change instruments, tempos and keys
freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.
Ge n e ra l MIDI
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks
to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary
designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound
generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files
that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General
MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be
played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit
to produce essentially the same musical performance.
Re g a rd in g Co p y rig h t
Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to
this product for any purpose other than private, personal
enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is
prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be
copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without
the permission of the copyright holder.
Ge n e ra l MIDI 2
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations
pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering
enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater
compatibility.
● Th e KF-9 0 a llo w s y o u to u se
Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI
recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and
how effects should be handled, have now been precisely
defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been
expanded.
th e fo llo w in g m u sic file s
●Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland
Piano Digital HP-G/KR Series instrument
General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of
reliably playing back music files that carry either the General
MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
●Roland Digital Piano Compatible music files
Roland’s original music file is made specifically for
practicing the piano. Some follow an instructional
curriculum, allowing for a complete range of lessons, such as
“practicing each hand separately” or “listening to only the
accompaniment.”
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which
does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as
“General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General
MIDI 2.
●SMF Music files (720KB/1.44MB format)
GS Fo rm a t
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music
file that was formulated so that files containing music file
could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer
of the listening device. An enormous variety of music is
available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical
instruments, for Karaoke, etc.
The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for
standardizing the performance of sound generating devices.
In addition to including support for everything defined by
the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format
additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides
for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a
wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb
and chorus.
If you wish to purchase SMF music files, please consult the
retailer where you purchased your KF-90.
Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily
include new sounds and support new hardware features
when they arrive.
SMF w ith Ly rics
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that
contains the lyrics. When music files carrying the “SMF with
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.
Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI,
Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music
files that have been created with the GS Format in mind).
This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS
Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying
either of these logos.
1 8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glo ssa ry
Arra n g e
Ke y To u ch
This is an abbreviation of “Arrangement.” It refers to
changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a
new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used.
This is the sensation of heaviness—the “touch”—of the keys
when the keyboard is played.
Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
The KF-90 automatically plays accompaniment when just a
few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to
specify the chord. This is called the “One Touch Arranger”
La y e r Pla y
Playing with two different tones on a key simultaneously is
Mu sic Sty le
Music Styles are performance patterns in various musical
genres. A Music Style is played automatically in accord with
the specified chord using the KF-90’s One-touch Arranger
Bo u n cin g Ba ll
The flashing dot that moves in a semicircular pattern across
Ch o rd
Pa rt
On the KF-90, “Part” can have two different meanings. One
right-hand part of a piano song. The other refers to the 16
Divisio n
The six performance states that make up a Music Style are
Pick u p
Dru m Se t
A Drum Set is a collection of percussive instrument sounds.
With drum sets, a different sound can be heard for each key
on the keyboard. The special effects sound set is called the
PU (Pick u p )
A song that does not start on the first beat starts with what is
called a pickup. When playing a pickup song, the measures
will be shown in the display as “PU, 1, 2...”.
Ed it
Editing is to change the song you have recorded, such as by
Sa ve
Saving is storing the recorded performance data onto a
En d in g
This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop
playing the automatic accompaniment, the KF-90 plays an
So u n d Ge n e ra to r
The sound generator of the KF-90 supports GM2/ GS, and
En se m b le
Sp lit Pla y
A combined performance of two or more instruments is
The division of the keyboard into upper and lower zones is
referred to as “Split,” and different tones can be played in the
keys on different sides of the key that acts as the boundary
called an “Ensemble.”
Ico n
The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional work
like buttons. These are called “Icons.”
Sta n d a rd Pitch
The pitch of the sound created by playing the middle A on
the keyboard is called the “Standard Pitch.” Changing the
standard pitch of the KF-90 is called “Master Tune,” and
In tro
This is the introductory portion of an automatic
accompaniment performance. The KF-90 plays an intro
ideally suited to each style when it starts playing the
1 8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glo ssa ry
To n e
Tones are the musical instruments or effect sounds stored in
the internal memory of the KF-90. The display shows
“TONE.”
Tu n in g Cu rve s
Graphic representations of the changes in pitch of the
equally-tempered tuning versus those of actual tunings are
1 8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n Ch a rt
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n Ch a rt
MIDI Imple
DIGITAL PIANO
Model KF-90
Date : Mar. 1, 2000
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
x
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4(M=1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
15–113
**************
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
x
O
x
Velocity
8n v=64
*1
*1
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
x
x
O
O
Pitch Bend
O
O
0, 32
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
1
O
*1
*1
*1
5
6, 38
7
O
O
O
Volume
10
O
Panpot
*1
*1
11
O
Expression
Hold 1
Control
Change
64
O
65
O
Portamento
Sostenuto
*1
66
O
67
O
Soft
84
O
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
*1
91
O (Reverb)
93
O (Chorus)
98, 99
100, 101
O
O
*1
*1
Prog
Change
O 0–127
**************
O
0–127
: True #
Program number 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
System
Common
System
Real Time
: Clock
: Commands
O
O
O
O
*3
*3
x
x
x
x
O
x
O (120, 126, 127)
: All sound off
O
:
Reset all controllers
Aux
Message
O
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
O (123–125)
O
x
* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.
* 3 O x is selectable.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
1 8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma in Sp e cifica tio n s
Co n tro l
<Ke y b o a rd >
Start/ Stop, Intro/ Ending (2 types for each styles), Sync.
Start, Fill-In (Variation/ Original), Arranger Reset, Count
Down, Melody Intelligence, Break, Leading Bass, Half Fill-
In (Variation/ Original)
Ke y b o a rd
88 keys Progressive Hammer Action mechanism
To u ch Se n sitivity
100 Levels
<Co m p o se r>
Ke y b o a rd Mo d e
Whole
Me tro n o m e
Beat: 2/ 2, 0/ 4, 2/ 4, 3/ 4, 4/ 4, 5/ 4, 6/ 4, 7/ 4, 3/ 8, 6/ 8, 9/ 8, 12/ 8
Volume: 10 levels
Split (adjustable Split Point)
Layer
Pattern: 11 patterns
Arranger
Sounds: 8 types
Piano Style Arranger
Manual Drum/ SFX
Tra ck
5/ 16 tracks
<So u n d So u rce >
So n g
Conforms to GM2/ GS
1 song
Ma x . Po ly p h o n y
N o te Sto ra g e
Stereo 64 voices
Approx. 30,000 notes
To n e s
Te m p o
9 groups 608 variations (including 16 drum sets, 1 SFX set)
Quarter note = 20 to 250
Te m p e ra m e n t
Re so lu tio n
8 types, selectable tonic
120 ticks per quarter note
Stre tch e d Tu n in g
Re co rd in g Me th o d
2 types
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In,
Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo)
Step (on Chord Sequence Mode)
Beat Map
Ma ste r Tu n in g s
415.3 Hz to 466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)
Tra n sp o se
Key Transpose (-6 to +5 half-steps)
Playback Transpose (-24 to +24 half-steps)
Ed it
Copy, Quantize, Delete, Insert, Erase, Transpose, Part
Exchange, Note Edit, PC Edit
Effe cts
Reverb (8 types, stepless level adjustable)
Chorus (8 types, 127 levels)
Advanced 3D
Rh y th m Pa tte rn
40 types
Co n tro l
Sympathetic Resonance, Rotary and 45 other types
Physical Damper Simulation
Song Select, Reset, Stop, Play, Rec, Bwd, Fwd, All Song
Play, Track Select, Count In, Playback Balance, Marker
Set, Repeat, Tempo Mute
<Arra n g e r>
Mu sic Sty le
Internal: 8 groups 142 styles x 4 types (Style Orchestrator)
Music Style Disk: 36 styles
Pro g ra m m a b le Mu sic Sty le s
Style Converter
Style Composer
Me lo d y In te llig e n ce
24 types
Use r Pro g ra m s
Internal: 36
Disk: Max. 99 sets
1 8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma in Sp e cifica tio n s
Co n n e cto rs
<Disk Drive / Disk Sto ra g e >
Output jacks (L/ Mono, R)
Input jacks (L/ Mono, R)
Microphone jack
Disk Drive / Disk Sto ra g e
3.5 inch micro floppy disk
Disk Fo rm a t
720K bytes (2DD)
1.44M bytes (2HD)
Headphone jack (stereo)
MIDI In connector
MIDI Out connector
Computer connector
Pedal jacks (Damper, Sostenuto, Soft)
So n g s
Max. 99 songs
Po w e r su p p ly
AC 117V/ 230V/ 240V
N o te Sto ra g e
Approx. 120,000 notes (2DD)
Approx. 240,000 notes (2HD)
Po w e r Co n su m p tio n
38W
Pla y a b le So ftw a re
Dim e n sio n s (W ith o u t th e m u sic re st)
Piano (KF-90):
Standard MIDI Files (format 0/ 1)
Roland Original Format (i-format)
1,321 (W) x 421 (D) x 136 (H) mm
52-1/ 16 (W) x 16-5/ 8 (D) x 5-3/ 8 (H) inches
Stand (FPS-9: Sold separately):
1,258 (W) x 390 (D) x 639 (H) mm
49-9/ 16 (W) x 15-3/ 8 (D) x 25-3/ 16 (H) inches
Total:
Sa ve
Standard MIDI Files (format 0)
Roland Original Format (i-format)
<O th e rs>
Ra te d Po w e r O u tp u t
10W x 2
1,321 (W) x 421 (D) x 774 (H) mm
52-1/ 16 (W) x 16-5/ 8 (D) x 30-1/ 2 (H) inches
Sp e a k e rs
10cm x 2, 5cm x 2
W e ig h ts (W ith o u t th e m u sic re st)
Piano (KF-90): 30 kg / 66 lbs 3 oz
Stand (FPS-9: Sold separately): 9.1 kg / 20 lbs 1 oz
Total: 39.1 kg / 86 lbs 4 oz
Disp la y
Beat Indicator
Graphic 320 x 240 dot backlit LCD
Language: English/ Japanese
Acce sso rie s
Owner's manual
Power Cord
DP-6
Ly rics
Yes (Built-in Display, MIDI Out)
Music rest
Co n tro l
Keyboard cover
Data Disk
Volume, Brilliance, Reverb, Balance, Microphone Volume
O n e To u ch Pla y
One Touch Piano, One Touch Arranger
Vo ca l Effe cts
Echo
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/
or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
Voice Transformer
Harmonist
O th e r Fu n ctio n s
Style Navigator, Tone Navigator, Composer Navigator,
Piano Master, Score, Audition, Panel Lock
1 8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
Numerics
E
Echo ............................................................................................ 44
Edit ............................................................................................ 124
A
F
Fill-In .......................................................................................... 77
Fwd (Forward) .......................................................................... 83
B
Basic Screen ................................................................................ 19
Beat ............................................................................................. 65
Bouncing Ball ............................................................................. 63
Brilliance ..................................................................................... 17
Bwd (Backward) ........................................................................ 83
G
General MIDI .......................................................................... 183
H
C
Headphones ............................................................................... 17
I
Index ........................................................................................... 25
Insert ......................................................................................... 128
Intro ............................................................................................ 67
K
L
Layer Part ................................................................................... 53
Lower Part .................................................................................. 55
Lyric .......................................................................................... 153
D
M
1 8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
Sound .................................................................................... 66
Tempo ................................................................................... 64
Volume ................................................................................. 66
MIDI Sync ................................................................................ 159
S
Save............................................................................................ 111
Sequencer (16-Track Sequencer)............................................ 118
SFX .............................................................................................. 59
Stop ............................................................................................. 83
N
O
P
T
Preset .......................................................................................... 70
Metronome........................................................................... 64
Transpose
U
Upper Part .................................................................................. 55
Q
R
V
Volume
Master ................................................................................... 17
Metronome .......................................................................... 66
Microphone .......................................................................... 18
W
1 9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
1 9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
1 9 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In fo rm a tio n
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
PAN AMA
ITALY
ISRAEL
SIN GAPO RE
AFRICA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
Sons Ltd.
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
N O RW AY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
JO RDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUN IO N
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
TAIW AN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: 273 0074
KUW AIT
Easa Husain Al-Yousifi
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
PO LAN D
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
TEL: 243-6399
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
SO UTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
LEBAN O N
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
PO RTUGAL
THAILAN D
VEN EZUELA
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/ 9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
TEL: (01) 20-1441
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
Q ATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
VIETN AM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
RO MAN IA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
EURO PE
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
RUSSIA
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
AUSTRALIA/
N EW ZEALAN D
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
ASIA
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM/ HOLLAND/
LUXEMBO URG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
CHIN A
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
TEL: (93) 308 1000
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Center
DEN MARK
SW EDEN
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing,
CHINA
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
N EW ZEALAN D
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (08) 702 0020
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
TEL: (039)16 6200
TURKEY
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/ 20
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
FRAN CE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
CEN TRAL/ LATIN
AMERICA
SW ITZERLAN D
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Musitronic AG
Gerberstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4410 Liestal, SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
HO N G KO N G
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
ARGEN TIN A
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
FIN LAN D
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Lauttasaarentie 54 B
Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND
TEL: (9) 682 4020
UKRAIN E
TEL: 2415 0911
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/ 108
IN DIA
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
GERMAN Y
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
UN ITED KIN GDO M
N O RTH AMERICA
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
TEL: (022) 493 9051
IN DO N ESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
CAN ADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
CO STA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
TEL: (040) 52 60090
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 700139
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: (061) 043-5400
MIDDLE EAST
KO REA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
CHILE
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
HUN GARY
Intermusica Ltd.
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
MALAYSIA
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
TEL: 211 005
U. S. A.
EL SALVADO R
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
OMNI MUSIC
IRELAN D
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo
,
PHILIPPIN ES
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
TEL: (323) 890 3700
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 66-9426
IRAN
MOCO, INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
MEXICO
TEL: (02) 899 9801
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (021) 285-4169
As of June 1, 2002 (Roland)
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This owner’s manual is printed on recycled paper.
02123634
’02-7-C2-61N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Ranger Marine Radio RCI 2950DX User Guide
Ratoc Systems Network Card REX PCICA1 User Guide
Renesas Computer Hardware M38C29T 64LCA User Guide
Renesas Switch M37760T RPD E User Guide
Roland Electronic Keyboard XV 88 User Guide
Ryobi Saw TS1352 User Guide
Samson Pacemaker AL300 User Guide
Sanyo Flat Panel Television CES26WSD7 B User Guide
Schneider Electric Marine Radio VW3 A3 303 User Guide
Scion Car Stereo System PT546 00080 User Guide